You are on page 1of 526

NMS5UX-B

6.4.7
Network Management System 5 UniX - B

User manual

MN.00247.E - 001
Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HP-UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
NMS5UX-B
Contents

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 17

NMS5UX-B SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 17

MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM .............................................................. 18

MODULARITY OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM.............................................................................. 19

MAPS................................................................................................................................ 21

EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B ................................................................................... 22


Equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (SNMP equipment) ......................................... 22
Equipment managed with the Legacy protocol (Legacy equipment) ..................................... 22

RELEASE OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM.................................................................................... 23

HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 24


MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B ................................................... 25

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF NMS5UX USERS................................................................................. 26

UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW.................................................................................................. 27

MENU BAR......................................................................................................................... 28

TITLE BAR ......................................................................................................................... 29

TOOL BAR ......................................................................................................................... 30

MAP AREA ......................................................................................................................... 32


Passing from one level to the other one in the Map area .................................................... 33
Objects of the Map area ................................................................................................ 33
To display/hide the Map area ......................................................................................... 33

VIEW AREA........................................................................................................................ 34
Passing from one level to the other in the View area.......................................................... 34
Objects of the View area................................................................................................ 34
Background of the View area.......................................................................................... 34

NEW OBJECT AREA ............................................................................................................. 35

OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................... 36
Graphic representation of the object: symbol ................................................................... 36
Symbol items: icon ....................................................................................................... 37
Symbol items: name ..................................................................................................... 38
Symbol items: check sign .............................................................................................. 38
Symbol items: notes ..................................................................................................... 39
Symbol characteristics: behavior .................................................................................... 39
Symbol characteristics: colour ........................................................................................ 40

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 1


Symbol characteristics: right button function.................................................................... 42

STATUS BAR ...................................................................................................................... 44

PLATFORM STATUS BAR ...................................................................................................... 45


To display/hide the platform status bar............................................................................ 46

EQUIPMENT WINDOW............................................................................................................ 47

ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW....................................................................................................... 48

ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW................................................................................................... 49

RING MANAGER WINDOW...................................................................................................... 50

VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW.............................................................................................. 51

NMS5UX USERS...................................................................................................................... 52

RELATION BETWEEN UNIX USER AND NMS5UX USER .............................................................. 53


PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER ................................................................................................ 54

CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER ................................................................................ 55


Username.................................................................................................................... 55
Password..................................................................................................................... 55
Map ............................................................................................................................ 56
Profile ......................................................................................................................... 57
Superuser.............................................................................................................. 57
Privileged .............................................................................................................. 57
Advanced .............................................................................................................. 57
Normal .................................................................................................................. 58
Entry .................................................................................................................... 58
Internet ...................................................................................................................... 58
Ring/VLAN ................................................................................................................... 58

EXPIRY OF A NMS5UX USER (ACCOUNT) ............................................................................... 60

FUNCTION OF MANUAL LOGIN TO THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW.......................................... 61

FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - USER.............................................................................. 62

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY) .................................................................. 63

UPDATING OF THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW IN READ ONLY MODALITY ................................ 64

PASSING FROM READ ONLY MODALITY TO READ-WRITE MODALITY .......................................... 65

FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - RW MAP.......................................................................... 66

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT WINDOW ............................................................. 67

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE NODAL WINDOW .................................................................... 68

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE RING MANAGER WINDOW........................................................ 69


MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW ................................................. 70

PROCEDURES 71

START-UP/CLOSING OF NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE (LOGIN/LOGOUT)..................... 71

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 2


START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE.............................................................................. 72

FIRST START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE..................................................................... 75

CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE.............................................................. 76

AUTOMATIC CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE ............................................ 77

GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................................................. 78

OBJECTS PRE-DEFINED FOR THE NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................ 79


Container objects ......................................................................................................... 79
Network Element objects ............................................................................................... 79
Real NE ................................................................................................................. 79
Virtual NE .............................................................................................................. 79
NE of ALplus Node type ........................................................................................... 80
NE of ALCplus2 Node type........................................................................................ 80
NE tipo WEB Generic ............................................................................................... 80
Generic Symbol objects ................................................................................................. 81
Link objects ................................................................................................................. 81
Label objects ............................................................................................................... 81
Ring objects................................................................................................................. 81
VLAN Map objects......................................................................................................... 81

RULES FOR THE CREATION OF THE OBJECTS ......................................................................... 82

OBJECTS CREATION - EDIT MENU ........................................................................................ 85


Examples of network graphical representation .................................................................. 85
Network composed by SNMP equipment..................................................................... 85
Network composed by Legacy equipment ................................................................... 88
Network composed by Legacy equipment and SNMP equipment .................................... 91
Network subdivided into more maps.......................................................................... 95
OBJECTS CREATION - ADD NETWORK FROM FILE FUNCTIONALITY............................................ 97
To create the file in csv format ....................................................................................... 97
Structure of the csv file ........................................................................................... 97
Rules of the compilation of the csv file ....................................................................... 99
To compile the csv file starting from a model .............................................................100
Example of use of Add Network From File functionality .....................................................101

OBJECT CREATION - AUTO DISCOVERY FUNCTIONALITY ........................................................104


Network Scan modality.................................................................................................104
NE Wake Up modality...................................................................................................106

EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ................................................................................................... 108

OPENING OF THE SERIAL PORTS .........................................................................................109

CONNECTION PROCEDURE .................................................................................................111

COMMANDS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF THE CONNECTION .....................................................112


Line Test command......................................................................................................112
Connect command .......................................................................................................112
Disconnect command ...................................................................................................112
Alarm Re-alignment command ......................................................................................113
Configuration Upload command .....................................................................................113
Legacy-Reset&Connect command ..................................................................................113

CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT .......................................................................114


Disconnected status .....................................................................................................114
Connected status.........................................................................................................114
Unreachable status ......................................................................................................115

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 3


Maintenance status ......................................................................................................115

LOM/LCT ..........................................................................................................................116
Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration ..................................116
Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user .........................................117
To enable/disable of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality .....................117

ALARM MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 118

ACQUISITION OF THE ALARMS............................................................................................119


Polling........................................................................................................................119

DYNAMIC DISPLAYING OF THE ALARMS................................................................................120


DISPLAYING OF THE CURRENT ALARMS AND OF THE ALARM HISTORY .....................................121

ALARM CORRELATION ........................................................................................................122

SAVING OF THE ALARMS ....................................................................................................123

ALARM SEVERITY ..............................................................................................................124


ENABLING/DISABLING OF THE ALARMS ...............................................................................126

FLEETING ALARMS ............................................................................................................127

MARKING OF THE ALARMS (ACKNOWLEDGE) ........................................................................128

MANAGEMENT OF NE LOG ..................................................................................................129

PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT ....................................................................... 130


ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF THE PM MEASURES ..............................................................131

ACQUISITION OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES ..........................................................132

DISPLAYING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES ............................................................133


SAVING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES TO DISK .....................................................134

MENU AND COMMANDS 135

MAP ..................................................................................................................................... 136

REFRESH..........................................................................................................................137
To update the UX Map Manager window..........................................................................137

MAP PROPERTIES ..............................................................................................................138


To modify the size of the symbols ..................................................................................138

SUBMAP PROPERTIES ........................................................................................................139


To associate/remove the background to a container .........................................................139

IMPORT/EXPORT ...............................................................................................................140
To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container ..................................140
To copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container.....................................142
To save the objects of a map/container to a file ...............................................................142
To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container......143
To compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/container...........144

CHANGE MAP ....................................................................................................................145


To close the open map and opening another one..............................................................145
To delete a map ..........................................................................................................146

EXIT ................................................................................................................................147

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 4


To close the UX Map Manager window ............................................................................147

EDIT .................................................................................................................................... 148

ADD ................................................................................................................................149
To create Container objects ..........................................................................................149
To create NE object managed with SNMP protocol ............................................................150
NSAP (Gosip) Address ............................................................................................151
To create virtual NE objects managed with SNMP protocol.................................................152
To create NE objects managed with Legacy protocol .........................................................152
To create virtual NE objects managed with Legacy protocol ...............................................153
To create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)..................................................................154
To create Link objects (connection) ................................................................................154
To create Label objects (wordings).................................................................................155
To create Container, NE (SNMP), Link and Label objects described in a file ..........................155

DELETE ............................................................................................................................156
To delete an object from the map ..................................................................................156

MODIFY/VIEW...................................................................................................................157
To verify/modify the parameters of a Container object......................................................157
To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object ...........................................157
To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object .............................................158
To verify/modify the parameters of a Link object .............................................................159
To verify/modify the parameters of a Label object............................................................159

INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................160
To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence,
Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol ...................................................................160
To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol ..............................................161

GRAPHICAL SYMBOL PROPERTIES .......................................................................................162


To verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol..............................162

FIND................................................................................................................................163
To search a symbol in the map ......................................................................................163

ARRANGE SYMBOLS...........................................................................................................164
To align the symbols ....................................................................................................164
GENERATE INFO FOR WEB..................................................................................................165
To check the database information necessary to the RAN ..................................................165

SET CURRENT WINDOW GEOMETRY FOR ALL CONTAINERS.....................................................166


To set the size of the containers windows .......................................................................166

VIEW ................................................................................................................................... 167


SHOW/HIDE MAP TREE ......................................................................................................168
To display/hide the Map area ........................................................................................168

SHOW/HIDE PLATFORM STATUS..........................................................................................169


To display/hide the platform status bar...........................................................................169

SHOW/HIDE LINK LABEL ....................................................................................................170


To show/hide the names of the Link objects ....................................................................170

PERFORMANCE..................................................................................................................... 171

PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ .....................................................................................172


To update the results of the PM measures of an equipment ...............................................172

PERFORMANCE MONITORING ..............................................................................................173


To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 5


(24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters ...................173
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records
15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters .................176

OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING .......................................................................................177


To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records
(24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table ..............................................177
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records
(15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table ...........................................178

EXPORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING ..................................................................................179


To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type ...179
VIEW/MODIFY P.M. STATUS................................................................................................181
To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs of the same
type...........................................................................................................................181
To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment
of the same type .........................................................................................................183
To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment
of the same type .........................................................................................................183

CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................. 184

EQUIPMENT INFO ..............................................................................................................185


To verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment ...............................185

RADIO CERTIFICATE ..........................................................................................................187


To verify/modify the data registration (conformity certificate) of a radio..............................187
To save to file or print the conformity certificate of a radio ................................................187

LEGACY-HW/SW EDITION INVENTORY .................................................................................188


To verify the hardware and software version of the objects relevant to the Legacy
equipment present into the open map ............................................................................188
To save/print the list of the objects ................................................................................189
To filter/order the list of the objects ...............................................................................189

LEGACY-PHYSICAL UNIT INVENTORY ...................................................................................191


To verify the objects list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map ......................191
To save/print the list of the objects ................................................................................192
To modify the identification code of the unit ....................................................................192
To filter/order the list of the objects ...............................................................................193

SNMP-SOFTWARE INVENTORY ............................................................................................194


To verify the software version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map ................194
To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment
present into the open map ............................................................................................196
To save/print the list of the equipment/units ...................................................................196
To open the equipment window .....................................................................................197
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................197
To update the equipment software .................................................................................197
To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller.........................197
To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment .................................198
To filter/order the list of the equipment/units ..................................................................198

SNMP-EQUIPMENT PORT CONFIGURATION............................................................................200


To verify the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment present into
the open map .............................................................................................................200
To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment ...............201
To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment ..............................202
To executes the Ping of an equipment ............................................................................202
To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different ...............................202
To modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa ......................202

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 6


To filter/order the list of the equipment ..........................................................................202

SNMP-NE PPP INTERFACES .................................................................................................204


To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment ...............204

SNMP-NE ROUTING TABLE..................................................................................................205


To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment ..............................205
To add an element to the Routing Table..........................................................................206
To delete an element from the Routing Table ..................................................................207
To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway..................................................207
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway ...........................................................207
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) ...............................................................207
SNMP-HW INVENTORY .......................................................................................................209
To display the hardware of the SNMP equipment present in the open map...........................209
To save the data to file.................................................................................................211
To save periodically the data to file ................................................................................212
To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file ..........................................................212

SNMP-NE BACKUP/RESTORE ...............................................................................................213


To display the backup files of the SNMP equipment present in the open map .......................213
To transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment (configuration
restore)......................................................................................................................216
To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) ..................................216
To lock/unlock a backup file ..........................................................................................216
NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info) ...................................................................217

LEGACY-ALARM AVERAGE...................................................................................................219
To display the mean of the alarms per second received by the NMS5UX-B system and
sent by the Legacy equipment.......................................................................................219

LOCATE ................................................................................................................................ 220

EQUIPMENT LIST LOCATE ...................................................................................................221


To display the list of the equipment................................................................................222
To save/print the list of equipment.................................................................................224
To filter/sort the list of the equipment ............................................................................225
To open the equipment window .....................................................................................226
To verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment.............................................226
To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and
Incorrect Upload of an equipment ..................................................................................226
To verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present...........................................227
To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment ..........................................227
To delete and rewrite the equipment table ......................................................................227
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment .................................................228
To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type ...229
To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ....................................230
To update the equipment software (SNMP) .....................................................................230
To update the equipment software (FAMxc).....................................................................231
To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of
an equipment..............................................................................................................232
To verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment .........................................................233
To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment.............................................233
To display/modify the certificate of conformity of a radio equipment ...................................233
To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test).....................................................234
To connect one or more equipment ................................................................................234
To disconnect one or more equipment ............................................................................235
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment.............................................................235

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 7


To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment.....................................................236
To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type ..........236
To reset and connect one or more equipment (Legacy) .....................................................237
To connect one or more CommServer-S .........................................................................237
To disconnect one or more CommServer-S......................................................................238
To start the Command Executor application ....................................................................238

PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST ....................................................................................................239


To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent ......................................239
To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment ................................240

COMMAND............................................................................................................................ 241

LINE TEST ........................................................................................................................242


To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment ........................................................242
To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ................................242

CONNECT .........................................................................................................................244
To connect one or more equipment ................................................................................244
To connect the equipment of one or more containers........................................................244
DISCONNECT....................................................................................................................246
To disconnect one or more equipment ............................................................................246
To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers....................................................246

SNMP-FORCE NE DISCONNECT............................................................................................248
To force the software disconnection of one or more SNMP equipment .................................248

SNMP-PING ......................................................................................................................249
To executes the Ping of a SNMP equipment .....................................................................249

LEGACY-RESET&CONNECT ..................................................................................................250
To reset and connect one or more Legacy equipment .......................................................250
To reset and connect the Legacy equipment of one or more containers ...............................250

ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT.......................................................................................................252
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment.............................................................252
To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ....................................252

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD ..................................................................................................254


To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment.....................................................254
To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ............................254

SNMP-CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD....................................................................................256
To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more
real SNMP equipment ...................................................................................................256
To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more
virtual SNMP equipment ...............................................................................................258

COMMUNICATION SERVER BOARD.......................................................................................259


To connect one or more CommServer-S .........................................................................259
To disconnect one or more CommServer-S......................................................................259

SNMP-RESET EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ...............................................................................261


To execute the software reset of an SNMP equipment .......................................................261

PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE...................................................................................................262


To transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms.......................................................262

FAULT .................................................................................................................................. 263

NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ................................................................................................264


To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map ......................................264
To save/print the alarms list..........................................................................................266

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 8


To copy the alarms list to a text editor ...........................................................................267
To delete the alarms ....................................................................................................267
To mark the alarms .....................................................................................................267
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm.........................................................268
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data.................................................268
To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................269
To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment.........................................................270
To verify the time interval between two different alarms ...................................................270
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................271
To sort the alarms list ..................................................................................................271
Modality of updating of the data ....................................................................................271
Modality of recording of the alarms ................................................................................272

NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS..............................................................................................273


To display alarms active in the equipment of the map.......................................................273
To save/print the alarms list..........................................................................................275
To mark the alarms .....................................................................................................275
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data.................................................275
To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................276
To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment.........................................................277
To verify the time interval between two different alarms ...................................................277
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................278
Modality of updating of the data ....................................................................................278

OLD ALARM HISTORY.........................................................................................................279


To display the alarm history present in the Old History table .............................................279
To save/print the alarms list..........................................................................................281
To copy the alarms list into a text editor .........................................................................281
To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................281
To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment.........................................................283
To verify the time interval between two different alarms ...................................................283
To sort the alarms list ..................................................................................................284
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm.........................................................284

NE ALARM HISTORY...........................................................................................................285
NE CURRENT ALARMS ........................................................................................................286

SNMP-NE HISTORY LOG .....................................................................................................287


To display the list of the NE Log of a SNMP equipment ......................................................287
To create a NE Log ......................................................................................................288
To create more NE Logs at the same time .......................................................................288
To display the content of a NE Log .................................................................................289
To delete a NE Log.......................................................................................................289
To delete all the NE Logs of a SNMP equipment ...............................................................289
To delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment.....................................290

SNMP-NE COMMAND LOG ...................................................................................................291


To display the list of the Command Log of a SNMP equipment............................................291
To create a Command Log ............................................................................................292
To create more Command Logs at the same time.............................................................293
To display the content of a Command Log.......................................................................293
To delete a Command Log ............................................................................................294
To delete all the Command Logs of a SNMP equipment .....................................................294
To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment..................294
NE Command Log (more info) .......................................................................................294

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 9


ALARM SUMMARY ..............................................................................................................295
To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to
the equipment present in the map .................................................................................295
To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................297
To display the alarms stored in the alarm history .............................................................298
To reset the indication of status change..........................................................................299
To set the automatic updating of the data .......................................................................299

SNMP-EVENT STATISTICS ..................................................................................................300


To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval ......................................300
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment .........................................302
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ................................................302
To delete the alarms ....................................................................................................303
To filter the alarms ......................................................................................................303

TRANSACTION LOG ...........................................................................................................305


To display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users ...................................305
To save/print the list of operations.................................................................................306
To delete the operations ...............................................................................................307
To filter the list of operations ........................................................................................307
Recording modality of the operations .............................................................................308

TOOLS.................................................................................................................................. 311

ALARM NOTIFICATION VIA E-MAIL.......................................................................................312


Alarm Notification via e-mail - Superuser ........................................................................312
To display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification
via e-mail .............................................................................................................312
To add an operator ................................................................................................313
To modify the characteristics of the operators............................................................314
To delete an operator .............................................................................................315
To activate/deactivate an operator ...........................................................................315
To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .................................315
To create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified
to the operator via e-mail .......................................................................................315
Alarm Notification via e-mail - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged ....................................316
To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .................................317
Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality .......................................................................317
SNMP-COMMAND EXECUTOR...............................................................................................318
To execute series of SNMP commands stored on file .........................................................318
To display the content of a file of SNMP commands ..........................................................319
To display the files of scheduled SNMP commands............................................................320

SNMP-NE MONITORING......................................................................................................321
To display the list of the measures .................................................................................321
To assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure)...........................322
To display the characteristics of a measure .....................................................................323
To delete a measure ....................................................................................................323
To activate a measure ..................................................................................................323
To deactivate a measure ..............................................................................................323
To display the results of a measure ................................................................................324
To save the results of a measure ...................................................................................324
To display the results of a measure stored into a file ........................................................325
To save the results of a measure stored into a file............................................................325
To delete a file ............................................................................................................325
NE Monitoring functionality ...........................................................................................327

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 10


SNMP-AUTO DISCOVERY ....................................................................................................328
To verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or
NE Wake Up modality) .................................................................................................328
To set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality ...........................330
To deactivate the Network Scan modality........................................................................332
To set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality .............................332
To deactivate the NE Wake Up modality..........................................................................333
To save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file .........................................................333
To retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file .................................................333
To display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table).........333
To search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table.........................................................335
To delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table ........................................335
To create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table ..............336

SNMP-RMON .....................................................................................................................337
To verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of a SNMP equipment (RMON statistics) ...............337
To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics .......................................339
To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics .................................340
To capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant ...............................340
To save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file .............341
To display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ........................................342
To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ....................345
To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics..............345
To save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ...........................................345
To verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to
a counter (RMON statistics)...........................................................................................346
To enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to
a counter (RMON statistics)...........................................................................................346
To disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) ..............................................347
Implementation of the RMON standard in the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B........348
Ethernet counters (RMON) ............................................................................................351

SNMP-XML EXPORT............................................................................................................353
To save the complete equipment configuration into a XML file............................................353
To display the active cronjobs (XML Export) ....................................................................355
To create a cronjob (XML Export)...................................................................................356
To delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export) ..................................................................356
To display the list of the XML files present in a given directory ...........................................356
To display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files ................................357
To display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files ...........................358
To convert a XML file into a HTML file .............................................................................358
To display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file.............................................................358
To delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files .................................................................360
To send email with one or more XML, Log or HTML in attachment ......................................360
Function XML Export (more information).........................................................................361

OPTIONS.............................................................................................................................. 365

LEGACY-NETWORK ALARM HYSTERESIS ...............................................................................366


To display the value of the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms (Legacy equipment) .366
To modify the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms ...............................................367

SNMP-NETWORK SEVERITY CODE........................................................................................368


To verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type ......368
To modify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type .....369

SNMP-EQUIPMENT SEVERITY CODE .....................................................................................370

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 11


To verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity)
of a SNMP equipment ...................................................................................................370
To enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity
of the alarms of a SNMP equipment ...............................................................................371
To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................372

NMS5UX SYSTEM USERS ....................................................................................................373


NMS5UX System Users - Superuser ...............................................................................373
To display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps........................373
To create a new map..............................................................................................374
To add a NMS5UX user ...........................................................................................374
To modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users.....................................................375
To delete a NMS5UX user........................................................................................375
To add a NMS5UX user (manual login to the UX Map Manager window - active) .............376
NMS5UX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user.....................................377
To display the characteristics of the user who opened the map ....................................377
To modify the password associated to one's NMS5UX user ..........................................378

NMS5UX LOGGED USERS ...................................................................................................379


To display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open ..........................................379
To require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user ...................................................380
To force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user ......................................................381
To send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users..........................................................381
To filter the NMS5UX users list ......................................................................................381
To display the list of the active NMS5UX-B applications.....................................................382
To require the closure of an NMS5UX-B application ..........................................................383
To force the closure of an NMS5UX-B application .............................................................383
To filter the NMS5UX-B applications list ..........................................................................383

SNMP-LCT EQUIPMENT USERS ............................................................................................385


To display the LCT users list of a SNMP equipment ...........................................................385
To add a new LCT user .................................................................................................386
To modify the characteristics of the LCT users .................................................................387
To delete a LCT user ....................................................................................................387
User list (more info).....................................................................................................387

SNMP-LCT LOGGED USERS .................................................................................................388


To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to a SNMP equipment .............388
To force the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user .............................................................389
LCT and NMS5UX users (more info) ...............................................................................389

SNMP-REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE ..........................................................................................390


To display the remote equipment list of a SNMP equipment ...............................................390
To add a station to the remote equipment list..................................................................391
To rename a station of the remote equipment list ............................................................392
To delete a station from the remote equipment list ..........................................................392
To add an equipment to the remote equipment list...........................................................392
To add more equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list ..............................394
To modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list.........................395
To delete an equipment from the remote equipment list ...................................................396
To move an equipment within the remote equipment list ..................................................396
To save to a file the remote equipment list......................................................................397
To restore from file the remote equipment list .................................................................397
Remote equipment list (more info).................................................................................397
Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list ........................398
Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list.....................399

SNMP-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD.............................................................................................400

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 12


To update the equipment software (SNMP) .....................................................................400
To update the WEB LCT application ................................................................................402
Equipment software (SNMP) (more info) .........................................................................403
WEB LCT application (SNMP) (more info) ........................................................................403

SNMP-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS ...................................................................................404


To display the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating ....................404
To delete one or more NEs from the list (SNMP) ..............................................................405
To stop the updating of the software (SNMP)...................................................................406
To save the list of the scheduled equipment ....................................................................406
To re-execute the software update.................................................................................406
To switch the memory bench.........................................................................................407
To filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment .............................................................408

SNMP-NE SW/FW RELEASE .................................................................................................409


To display the software version of a SNMP equipment.......................................................409
To update the software of a SNMP equipment..................................................................410
To switch the operation of the memory benches of a SNMP equipment controller..................411
To delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of a SNMP equipment..........411

FAMXC-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD ...........................................................................................412


To update the equipment software (FAMxc).....................................................................412
Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info) ........................................................................413

FAMXC-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS..................................................................................414


To display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating...................................414
To delete one or more equipment from the list (FAMxc) ....................................................415
FAMXC-NE SW/FW RELEASE ...............................................................................................416
To display the software version of a FAMxc equipment......................................................416
To switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc ..............................417

LEGACY-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD..........................................................................................418


To update the equipment software (Legacy) ....................................................................418
Equipment software (Legacy) (more info) .......................................................................419
LEGACY-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS ................................................................................420
To display the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating ..................420
To delete one or more equipment from the list (Legacy) ...................................................421
To stop the updating of the software (Legacy) .................................................................421

MISC .................................................................................................................................... 422

ALARM HISTORY BACKUP ...................................................................................................423


To backup the alarm history..........................................................................................423

ALARM HISTORY RESTORE .................................................................................................424


To restore the alarm history from disk ............................................................................424
To restore the alarm history from tape ...........................................................................424

ALARM HISTORY DELETE BACKUP........................................................................................425


To delete the backup files of the alarm history.................................................................425

PERFORMANCE MONITORING BACKUP..................................................................................426


To save the PM measures (backup) ................................................................................426
PERFORMANCE MONITORING RESTORE ................................................................................427
To restore the PM measures from disk ............................................................................427
To restore the PM measures from tape ...........................................................................427

PERFORMANCE MONITORING DELETE ..................................................................................428


To delete the backup files of the PM measures.................................................................428

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 13


NMS5UX GLOBAL DATABASE BACKUP ..................................................................................429
To save the database (backup)......................................................................................429

NMS5UX GLOBAL DATABASE RESTORE.................................................................................430


To restore the database................................................................................................430

RING MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 431

EDIT > RM-ADD RING........................................................................................................432


To create Ring objects..................................................................................................432

EDIT > RM-DELETE RING ...................................................................................................433


To delete a Ring object from the map .............................................................................433

EDIT > RM-MODIFY/VIEW RING ..........................................................................................434


To verify/modify the parameters of a Ring object .............................................................434

FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ..............................................................................435


To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by
the supervision system.................................................................................................435
To save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................437
To delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ............................................................437
To mark the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................438
To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Alarm
History)......................................................................................................................438
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Alarm History) ........438
To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................439
To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................440
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History) ................441
Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Alarm History) ............................................442
Modality of recording of the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ........................................442
FAULT > RM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM .............................................................................443
To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by
the supervision system.................................................................................................443
To save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................444
To mark the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................445
To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Current
Alarm) .......................................................................................................................445
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Current Alarm)........445
To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................445
To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .........................................................447
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm) ................448
Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Current Alarm) ...........................................448

FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY ............................................................................449


To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to
the equipment present in the Rings................................................................................449
To filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary).......................................................450
To open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained
(RM-Network Alarm Summary)......................................................................................452
To save the set filters to a file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ...........................................452
To delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained
(RM-Network Alarm Summary)......................................................................................453
To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary) .................453
To reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ..............................453
To modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ........453

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY ...............................................................................454

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM...............................................................................455

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 14


FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM SUMMARY ..............................................................................456

LOCATE > RM-RING BROWSER ...........................................................................................457


To display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5UX-B ...............................................457
To open the Ring Manager window .................................................................................458
To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring...................................................458

LOCATE > RM-PATH BROWSER ...........................................................................................459


To display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ................................459
To save the list of the Path ...........................................................................................461
To delete one or more Paths .........................................................................................461
To delete the protection of a Path ..................................................................................462
To add the protection to a Path .....................................................................................462
To activate the management of a Path ...........................................................................462
To deactivate the management of a Path ........................................................................463
To switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection ..............................................463
To display the active alarms in the equipment implementing a Path....................................463
To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing a Path .......................463
To display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path ................................................463
To display/modify the configuration of a Path ..................................................................465
To display/modify the configuration of a Path protected ....................................................468
To search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained..............470
To search and highlight in the map window, the Ring symbol in which it is present a Path .....470
To filter/sort the list of the Path.....................................................................................470

LOCATE > RM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER ..................................................................................472


To display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ........................472
To filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser) ........................................................473
To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window ............474

VLAN MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 475

EDIT > VM-ADD VLAN MAP .................................................................................................476


To create VLAN Map objects ..........................................................................................476

EDIT > VM-DELETE VLAN MAP ............................................................................................477


To delete a VLAN Map object from the map .....................................................................477
EDIT > VM-MODIFY/VIEW VLAN MAP ...................................................................................478
To verify/modify the parameters of a VLAN Map object .....................................................478

FAULT > VM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ..............................................................................479


To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by
the supervision system.................................................................................................479
To save the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................481
To delete the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ............................................................481
To mark the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................481
To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Alarm
History)......................................................................................................................482
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Alarm History) ........482
To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................482
To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................484
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Alarm History).................484
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Alarm History) ............................................485
Modality of recording of the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ........................................485

FAULT > VM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM .............................................................................486


To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by
the supervision system.................................................................................................486

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 15


To save the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................487
To mark the alarms (VM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................488
To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Current
Alarm) .......................................................................................................................488
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Current Alarm)........488
To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................488
To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) .........................................................490
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Current Alarm) ................490
Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Current Alarm) ...........................................491

FAULT > VM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY ...............................................................................492

FAULT > VM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM...............................................................................493

LOCATE > VM-VLAN MAP BROWSER.....................................................................................494


To display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5UX-B .......................................494
To open the VLAN Manager Map window .........................................................................495
To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map ...........................................495
To filter the list of the VLAN Map....................................................................................495

LOCATE > VM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER ..................................................................................496


To display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map ................496
To filter the equipment list (VM-Equipment Browser) ........................................................497
To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window ....498

HELP .................................................................................................................................... 499

ABOUT NMS5UX-B .............................................................................................................500


LICENSE INFORMATION .....................................................................................................501
To display the detail of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system .....................501

DISPLAY LEGEND ..............................................................................................................502


To display the legend of the colours which the objects can assume.....................................502

NMS5UX SOFTWARE MODULE .............................................................................................503


To verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package ...............503
To print the list of programs..........................................................................................504
To end possible processes, relevant only to the Legacy equipment that have remained
appended ...................................................................................................................504
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR ..................................................................................................505

OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................506

MANAGER .....................................................................................................................507

APPENDICES 508

MENUS AND COMMANDS ...................................................................................................... 508

OPERATIONS INDEX ............................................................................................................ 514

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 523

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 16


GENERAL DESCRIPTION

NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

The NMS5UX-B system (Network Management System 5 Unix-B) has been developed to monitor and man-
age telecommunications equipment.

The user can communicate to the supervision system by means of a graphic window, called UX Map Man-
ager which represents the NMS5UX-B graphical interface at general level (see Fig.1).

The NMS5UX-B system has been developed to be used together with the UNIX operating system and
makes use of all the functionalities of this system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 17


MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

Monitoring of the equipment connected to the system; dynamic displaying of the detection of an
alarm and recording into the alarm history (resident on the machine disk).
The displaying stored into the alarm history are related among them: the date/time of detection
and clearing of the alarm are indicated in the same record. The alarm history can be saved and re-
covered later.
Management of the alarm Log stored in the controller of the equipment: storing of the Log on the
machine, deletion of the Log from the controller.
Management and change of the severity level coupled to each equipment alarm.
Notification via e-mail of the alarm detection.

Graphic or table representation of the network.


The representation of the network is executed by the user by means of a series of predefined ob-
jects. It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects an-
ytime.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps. The objects of a map
can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map.
The creation of the objects can be executed by the user by means of one of the following ways:
Creation of each single object by means of a specific command (see Edit > Add menu).
Creation of the objects by means of the Add Network From File functionality: automatic cre-
ation of the objects described in a file in csv format.
Creation of the NE objects by means of the Auto Discovery functionality: detection of the
equipment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system; auto-
matic creation and connection of the discovered NE objects.

Management of the measures of Performance Monitoring (PM) of all the equipment connected to
the system:
Activation/deactivation of the measures also contemporary for more equipment of the same
type.
Check of the result of the measures in graphic format.
Store on disk/tape the results. Then, the data can be restored, displayed and saved (subdi-
vided by month) on a file. The saving operation can be executed for a single measurements
of a single equipment or for a measurement of all the equipment of the same type present
into the map.
Management of the equipment software: immediate or scheduled updating of the software of the
equipment connected to the system, check of the software versions.

Management of the equipment configuration: saving of the equipment configuration to file. Then,
it will be possible to transfer the configuration to any equipment present in the network.

Management of the virtual equipment.

Command Executor: program that executes predefined sequences of SNMP commands. The prede-
fined sequences of SNMP commands are provided at customers request by SIAE MICROELETTRO-
NICA.

List of the application programs (browser, manager, etc.), relevant to the NMS5UX-B system, on
progress at the choice of the command.

Possibility to require for or to force the closing of an application program on progress (browser,
manager, etc.) of the NMS5UX-B system.

List of the users connected with the supervisory system. Possibility to require for or to force the
disconnection procedure (logout) of an user. Possibility to forward messages to a single user or to
all the users connected with the supervisory system.

Management of the LCT user list stored for each single equipment.

Access to the system with 5 different user profiles which determine the available commands and
the functions.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 18


MODULARITY OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

The NMS5UX-B supervision system is a modular system.


It is composed by a set of main applications which, depending on the type of equipment it must manage
or on the type of functionality you wish to implement, one or more applications are added to.

The group of main applications manages the NMS5UX-B graphic interface at general level (UX Map Manager
window - Fig.1) through which the user can represent graphically the network, manage the connection,
check the operating status, the results of the measures of Performance Monitoring, etc. of the equipment.
At this level, the equipment is considered on its whole.

The equipment additional application (called <equipment type> Manager) as the task to provide, to the
NMS5UX-B interface, specific commands and functions with respect to the type of equipment that must be
managed.

Each equipment additional application manages a specific equipment graphic interface (pag.47/pag.48)
through which the user can, besides checking the operating status of the equipment, directly intervene in
its management checking or modifying the configuration parameters and verifying the quality parameters
of the signal. The NMS5UX-B supervision system can be provided with one or more Manager applications
according to the equipment types present in its own network.

The access to the graphic interface at general level takes place at the opening of the UX Map Manager win-
dow, while the access to the graphic interface at equipment level takes place opening the equipment win-
dow relevant to the equipment itself. The opening of an equipment window depends on the opening of the
UX Map Manager window.

The additional application Ring Manager (RM) has the task to provide the NMS5UX-B interface with the
commands and the functions specific for the configuration and the management of the network paths
(Path) among the PDH and SDH telecommunications equipment.
The Ring Manager application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of the graphical interface
NMS5UX-B (menu Ring Manager - pag.431) which allows representing, by means of the Ring objects, the
subnetworks of equipment which implement Path directly in the maps, verifying the functional status of
the NEs/Links/Paths present in the Ring objects and displaying the list of the objects Ring, Path and NE.
At this level, the Ring object is considered as a whole.

From the graphical object Ring, you can access the Ring Manager window (pag.50) which allows represent-
ing and managing the single equipment, Links and Paths present in a Ring object.

The opening of a Ring Manager window depends on the opening of the UX Map Manager window. Moreover
a Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).

The additional application VLAN Manager (VM) has the task to provide the interface NMS5UX-B commands
and specific functions for the configuration and the network-level management of virtual LAN paths (VLAN
paths) among the radio equipment with Ethernet tributaries.

VLAN Manager application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of the graphical interface
NMS5UX-B (menu VLAN Manager - pag.475) which allows representing, by means of the VLAN MAP ob-
jects, the subnetworks of equipment which implement VLAN paths directly in the maps, verifying the func-
tional status of the NEs present in the VLAN Map objects and displaying the list of the objects VLAN Map
and NE. At this level, the VLAN Map object is considered as a whole.

From the graphical object VLAN Map, you can access the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51) which allows
representing and managing the single equipment, Links and VLAN paths present in a VLAN Map object.

The opening of a VLAN Manager Map window depends on the opening of the UX Map Manager window.
Moreover a VLAN Manager Map window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).

The additional application Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) allows a NMS5UX user controlling and managing
the SNMP equipment connecting, via Internet, to his own NMS5UX-B system through his own PC and using
the installed O.S. and the browser.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 19


The servlet RAN carries out the connection with the NMS5UX-B system and displays the Web page Remote
Access NMS5UX which allows monitoring/managing the equipment connected to ones supervision system
and present in a map.

The access to the servlet RAN takes place opening the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX, which can be
opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).

The additional application Geographical Redundancy (GR) allows managing the redundancy of the maps
among the different NMS5UX-B systems in order to keep the supervision/management of the maps of a
malfunctioning system through a different NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system.

With map redundancy we mean the management, by a NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system, of all the equipment
associated to that specific map.

The GM application has been designed to work as part of the NMS5UX-B, in fact its interface is integrated
within the TMNMENU window (start menu) of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface.

The additional application P.M. Data Export allows exporting the results of the Performance Monitoring
measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B system.

The data are exported directly from the tables of the NMS5UX-B database to a file in TLFF format. This
operation can be both manually carried out by the user or set and periodic operation.

Moreover the application allows re-importing the data previously saved to file into the Oracle table of PM.

The P.M. Data Export application is not provided with a graphic interface but its implementation is executed
by typing specific commands in the command line of a terminal window.

The additional application Proxy Agent allows dispatching the alarm traps, relevant to all the equipment
managed by ones NMS5UX-B system, to an higher level Central Element Manager.

The Proxy Agent application is, in part, integrated into the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (setting, at level
of single equipment, of the address of the machine, which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from
the equipment to) and, in part, integrated in the TMNMENU window (start menu) of the NMS5UX-B graphic
interface (activation, deactivation and management of the Proxy Agent application).

This manual describes the use of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface at general level (UX Map Manager
window).
The use of the equipment graphic interface changes depending on the type of equipment which is referred
to. It is reported in the relevant user manuals.
For the description and use of the additional application:
RM, VM, RAN and GR, refer to relevant documentation.
PM Data Export, refer to the relevant technical specifications.
Proxy Agent, refer to pag.150/pag.152 (setting of the Proxy address of the equipment) and to
the administrator manual (management of the Proxy Agent application).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 20


MAPS

The NMS5UX-B system allows associating a map to each single NMS5UX user. More user can be associated
to the same map.

At the opening of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1), the map associated to the user that executed the
operation opens.

The whole equipment network or a portion of it can correspond to a map. In this second case, the user
which the map is associated to, will receive only notifications coming from the equipment contained in his
portion of network.

To manage an equipment it is necessary to create a graphic symbol that represents it. The same symbol
can be created in more maps (creation of more copies of the symbol). In this way, the equipment data are
not duplicated in the database, but all the copies access to the same information.
Then, it is possible to save objects of a map into a file and export/import object of a map to another one.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 21


EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B

The NMS5UX-B system release 6.4.7 is able to manage at the same time equipment that use as equipment-
supervisory system communication protocol the following one:
The SNMP standard protocol (Simple Network Management Protocol). Into the manual, such
equipment are called equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (SNMP equipment).
A proprietary protocol. Into the manual, such equipment are called equipment managed by the
Legacy protocol (Legacy equipment).

Equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (SNMP equipment)

ALS series radio with ALS IDU (ALS)


ALS series radio with ALS-C IDU (ALS-C)
ALS series radio with AL IDU (AL)
ALS series radio with ALC IDU (ALC)
ALS series radio with AL IDU plus (ALplus)
ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus (ALCplus)
ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU (ALplus2)
ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU (ALCplus2)
EL series radio
US series radio
ELFO radio
ALFO radio
SDH N+1 radio

ALplus node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment ALplus interconnected by Nodal Bus.
ALCplus2 node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment ALCplus2 interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM
traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic).

FAMxc 5 RU multiplexer
FAMxc 2.5 RU multiplexer
ADM1 multiplexer
EXP63 multiplexer
ADMC multiplexer

PMP system - Point to MultiPoint


By means of a single PMP object, one PMP sector is controlled and managed (together with the
master station, the peripheral station and the optional equipment).

CommServerS (CS)
IPBOX

Equipment managed with the Legacy protocol (Legacy equipment)

G series radio with Legacy interface


B series radio (Standard)
FAM multiplexer
OLTME multiplexer
C-FAM multiplexer

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 22


RELEASE OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

The information contained in this manual refers to the system and the NMS5UX-B graphic interface release
6.4.7.

The release can be checked at the opening of the graphic interface (Login window) or selecting the Help
> About NMS5UX-B (pag.500).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 23


HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

The detail of the hardware and software requirements required by the NMS5UX-B system is reported in the
administrator manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 24


MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B

The maximum number of equipment that can be contemporarily managed by the NMS5UX-B system de-
pends on the codeword required by the customer.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 25


MAXIMUM NUMBER OF NMS5UX USERS

The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1), using the
same map or different maps, depends on the codeword required by the customer.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 26


UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW

At the start of the NMS5UX-B graphical interface the UX Map Manager window opens. The window is dis-
played in Fig.1. The elements that compose the window are:

MENU bar (pag.28)


TITLE bar (pag.29)
TOOL bar (pag.30)
MAP area (pag.32)
VIEW area (pag.34)
NEW OBJECT area (pag.35)
OBJECTS (pag.36)
STATUS bar (pag.44)
PLATFORM STATUS bar (pag.45)

First time the UX Map Manager window of a new map opens, the Map and View areas are empty (unless
the system has been previously configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA). In this case, before connecting
the equipment, it is necessary to graphically represent the network in their own map (pag.78).
The NMS5UX-B graphic interface has been developed to be used in Unix environment, therefore it respects
the conventions - relevant to the menu arrangement, the window style, the use of the keyboard, of the
mouse and so on - typical of this operating system.

Fig.1 UX Map Manager window

TITLE bar MENU bar TOOL bar

OGGETTI

MAP area STATUS bar NEW OBJECT area VIEW area PLATFORM STATUS bar

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 27


MENU BAR

Menu:
Map (pag.136). It contains the commands for the management of the map: to update the data,
to resize the symbols, to manage the background, to change/delete the map, to export/import
the elements of a map to/from another one and to save on a file all the symbols (container, NE,
etc.) present into a map.
Edit (pag.148). It contains the commands for the management of the objects: creation, modi-
fication, deletion, search, alignment.
View (pag.167). It contains the commands to hide/show the elements of the UX Map Manager
window.
Performance (pag.171). It contains the commands for the management of the measures of
Performance Monitoring (PM) of the equipment.
Configuration (pag.184). It contains the commands to check the status/operation of an equip-
ment and the configuration of the software/hardware of the equipment.
Locate (pag.220). It contains the commands to display and manage, in table format, the equip-
ment.
Command (pag.241). It contains the commands for the management of the connection be-
tween the equipment and the NMS5UX-B system and for the execution of the download of the
configuration of an equipment to another equipment.
Fault (pag.263). It contains the commands for the management of the equipment alarms and
for the display of the history of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users.
Tools (pag.311). It contains the commands to start the Command Executor application, for the
management of the alarm notification via e-mail, to manage the periodic monitoring of param-
eters, to manage the statistics of the Ethernet tributaries, to manage the Auto Discovery and
XML Export functionality.
Options (pag.365). It contains the commands for the management of the alarm severity, of the
NMS5UX-B/LCT users, of the list of remote equipment and the commands for the updating of
the equipment software.
Misc (pag.422). It contains the commands to save/recover/delete from disk/tape the alarm his-
tory, the results of the PM measures and the system database.
Ring Manager (pag.431). It contains the commands for the management of the Ring objects.
The menu is available only if the Ring Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the
relevant documentation.
VLAN Manager (pag.475). It contains the commands for the management of the VLAN Map
objects.
The menu is available only if the VLAN Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the
relevant documentation.
Help (pag.499). It contains the commands to open the on-line manuals of the supervisory sys-
tem and to check the list of the software programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software pack-
age.

Each item, if selected, opens a cascade menu that lists a series of commands.

Some commands immediately execute the action associated to them, others open further cascade menus
(items followed by ).

When a command is displayed greyed out, instead of white, it means that it is not available.

The deactivation of a command can depend on the type of access to the map (pag.63), on the equipment
type or one's user profile (pag.57)does not foresee the use of the command or, even, to make the com-
mand available it is necessary to execute before another action as, for example, to select a symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 28


TITLE BAR

This bar points out the window name, which can be configured by the superuser. By default, the name is
<company name - UX Map Manager>.

For description convenience, in this manual the main window of the graphic interface of the NMS5UX-B
system is identified by the wording UX Map Manager.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 29


TOOL BAR

Tab.1 shows the description of the push-buttons.

Tab.1 Push-buttons (UX Map Manager window)

Buttons Description Equivalent command

It closes the UX Map Manager window Map > Exit (pag.147)

It displays the objects present at Map level in -


the View area (pag.32)

It displays the objects present at the previous -


level (parent level) in the View area (pag.32)

It displays the objects present in the last select- -


ed container (go back push-button) into the
View area.

It searches a symbol in the map Edit > Find (pag.163)

It aligns two or more objects vertically * Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical (pag.164)

It aligns two or more objects horizontally * Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal (pag.164)

It hides/displays the labels of the Link objects View > Show/Hide Link Label (pag.170)
(pag.81)

It hides/displays the Map area (pag.32) View > Show/Hide Map Tree (pag.168)

It hides/displays the platform status bar View > Show/Hide Platform Status (pag.169)
(pag.45)

It creates a new SNMP equipment Edit > Add > Network Element > SNMP Managed
(pag.149)

It creates a new container Edit > Add > Container (pag.149)

It displays the list of the equipment Locate > Equipment List Locate (pag.221)

It displays the results of the PM measures for Performance > Performance Monitoring (pag.173)
the selected NE **

It displays the alarm history Fault > Network Alarm History (pag.264)

It displays the list of the alarms active on the Fault > Network Current Alarms (pag.273)
equipment

It executes the Line Test for the selected NE *** Command > Line Test > Network Element
(pag.242)

It connects the selected equipment *** Command > Connect > Network Element
(pag.244)

It disconnects the selected equipment *** Command > Disconnect > Network Element
(pag.246)

It re-aligns the alarms and the configuration for Command > Configuration Upload > Network Ele-
the selected equipment *** ment (pag.254)

It re-aligns the alarms for the selected equip- Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Network Ele-
ment *** ment (pag.252)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 30


Buttons Description Equivalent command

It reduces the graphic symbols size in the View Map > Map Properties (pag.138) (20 pixel)
area (Zoom 40%)

It restores the average size of the graphic sym- Map > Map Properties (pag.138) (38 pixel)
bol in the View area (Zoom 70%)

It enlarges the graphic symbols size in the View Map > Map Properties (pag.138) (50 pixel)
area (Zoom 100%)

* The push-button is available only if at least two objects are selected.


** The push-button is available only if one equipment is selected.
*** The push-button is available only if at least one equipment is selected.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 31


MAP AREA

The Map area is the part of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) where the map objects, created by the
user to represent the equipment network, are displayed (except for the Link and Label objects).

The displaying of the map is of tree type, in order to represent also the hierarchical links among the dif-
ferent items.

The Map: test map level (see Fig.2) represents the highest hierarchical level: Map level. It is automatically
created on the creation of the map and its name corresponds to the name assigned by the user to the map.
This level cannot be deleted using the commands present in the UX Map Manager window, it is automati-
cally deleted on the deletion of the map.

The lower levels are represented by containers that can contain more NE (pag.79), Generic Symbol
(pag.81), Link (pag.81), Label (pag.81), Container (pag.79), Ring (pag.81) and VLAN Map (pag.81) ob-
jects. The presence of a Container object automatically creates a hierarchically lower level (child level) with
respect to the current level (parent level) as shown in Fig.2.

The subdivision of the equipment network into containers, and then into levels, allows creating areas where
grouping the equipment and items related by some characteristics, for example geographical or other.

In this way, when a Container object is selected, in the View area (pag.32) only the elements present in
the container will be displayed and not all the network elements.

In fact, the selection of a container (or of an element contained in it) changes the content of the View area.
All the objects present in the same level are listed in the area Map in alphanumeric order.

Each container (except for the Map level) has the + or - symbol, displayed one alternatively to the other
(see Fig.2). Symbol:
+. The elements present in the container are not displayed in the Map area under the container
itself (collapsed list).
-. The elements present in the container are displayed in the Map area under the container itself
(expanded list).

It is possible to expand/collapse a list selecting the +/- symbol.

The user (independently from its operating level or access type) can anytime display or hide the Map area
(pag.33).

Fig.2 Map area (UX Map Manager window)

Map
container
Child level of the
Map container

Child level of the


Lower
Map container.
container
Parent level of
the Cologno M.
container

Child level of the


Milan container

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 32


Passing from one level to the other one in the Map area

To pass to the:
Higher level (parent level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area
(pag.32) press or select the container that represents the wished higher level.
Lower level (child level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area, select
the container that represents the wished lower level.

To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press or select the Map: container.

Objects of the Map area

The characteristics of the objects present in the Map area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc. are
described in the par. Objects (pag.36).

To display/hide the Map area

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press .


The Map area is hidden.

2. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press again to display the area again.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 33


VIEW AREA

The View area is the part of the UX Map Manager window where the objects present in the container, se-
lected in the Map area (pag.32), are displayed.

For example in Fig.1, if the Venice container is selected in the Map area, the NE objects ADM1, AL E/W,
AL-P1 and the possible Link and Label objects (objects that are not displayed in the Map area) will be dis-
played in the View area.

The selected container, once selected the level displayed in the View area, is indicated above the area itself
in the Contents of Map: field.

The symbol / separates the levels.

For example, in Fig.1, the Contents of Map: test map/Venice field points out that the objects represented
in the View area are present in the test map (parent level) and in the Venice container (current level).

Passing from one level to the other in the View area

To pass to the:
Higher level (parental level), with respect to that represented in the View area, press .
Lower level (child level), with respect to that represented in the View area, double click on the
container that represents the level you wish to access.

To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press .

Objects of the View area

The characteristics of the objects present in the View area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc. are
described in the par. Objects (pag.36).

Background of the View area

It is possible to associate a background to each container, in such a way that, on its selection, the back-
ground is displayed in the View area besides the symbols present in the container (pag.139).

It is possible to associate a different background to each container of the same map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 34


NEW OBJECT AREA

The new objects are parked in this area after their creation, waiting for their positioning by the user inside
the View area (pag.34).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 35


OBJECTS

An object is the representation, in the graphic interface of the NMS5UX-B system, of a network element.
The NMS5UX user must consider each part of the network as an object. For example, the network on its
whole is an object, the container (sub network, station, sub-station) where the equipment are located is
an object, each single equipment is an object.
An object can be:
Created - see Edit > Add (pag.149), Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery (pag.328), Ring Manager >
Edit > RM-Add Ring (pag.432) and VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map (pag.476) com-
mand.
Deleted - see Edit > Delete (pag.156), Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring (pag.433) and
VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Delete VLAN Map (pag.477) command.
Modified - see Edit > Modify/View (pag.157), Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring
(pag.434) and VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Modify/View VLAN Map (pag.478) command.
Moved. To move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the left mouse but-
ton, bring it to the new position.
In the Map area (pag.32), it is possible to move the objects from a container to the other. In
the View area (pag.34) it is possible to put the object in a new position inside the area (contain-
er). Furthermore, it is possible to select an object in the View area and drag it into a container
of the Map area or vice versa.

All the created objects and the relevant values of the parameters are stored into the database of the
NMS5UX-B system. They will be stored until the user deletes the object.

The NMS5UX-B system has a series of predefined objects, which allow the user drawing his network and
providing to the system all the information necessary for the supervision and the monitoring of each single
equipment.
In details, Container (pag.79), Network Element (NE) (pag.79), Generic Symbol (pag.81), Link (pag.81),
Label (pag.81), Ring (pag.81) and VLAN Map (pag.81) objects.
On the creation/deletion/modification/move of an object:
Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Ring or VLAN Map the object is represented/deleted/changed/
moved both in the Map area and in the View area.
Link or Label, the object is represented/deleted/changed/moved only in the View area.

The graphic representation of the object is the symbol (pag.36).


A symbol is composed by the following elements: icon (pag.37), name (pag.38), check sign (pag.38),
notes (pag.39) and it is characterized by behavior (pag.39), colour (pag.40) and right button function
(pag.42).

Graphic representation of the object: symbol

When an object is created, its graphic representation in the map is the symbol.
More symbols can correspond to an object. In fact, if the same object is created more times, we do not
create a new object but simply a copy of its graphic representation, then a new symbol is created. The
symbol of the same object can be created more times in the same map or in other maps as shown in Fig.3.
In the system database, on the creation of the object, the relevant parameter are stored. On the creation
of the next copies (symbols) of the object, the values of the parameters are not inserted again, but the
values already present in the database are used.
To execute an operation, often it is necessary to select the symbol (or the symbols) which you wish to
operate on. The selected symbol is characterized by a dark grey square. It will remain selected until the
user selects another symbol.
It is possible to select one or more symbols at the same time pressing the left mouse button and drawing
an area containing the interested symbols or keeping pressed the Ctrl key selecting the symbols.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 36


Fig.3 Relation between object and symbol

Map 1 Map 2 Map 3

Container 1 Container 1

Graphical Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol


representation A A A A
of the object A
in the maps
Symbol Symbol
A A

Information
relevant to
object A in Object A
the database

Symbol items: icon

The icon is the graphic representation of the symbol.

All the objects of the NMS5UX-B system, except for the Label object, has a its own icon.
Tab.2 points out the symbol and the relevant icons represented in the Map (pag.32) and View (pag.34)
areas.

Tab.2 Icon (UX Map Manager window)

Icon
Symbol Icon (View area)
(Map area)

Container
-
Map

Container
...

Generic
Symbol
.....

Link
-

Label -

Ring

VLAN Map

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 37


Icon
Symbol Icon (View area)
(Map area)

Network SNMP equipment


Element
ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with
ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU AL IDU/ALC IDU AL IDU plus ALC IDU plus ALplus2 IDU

ALS series radio with ALplus ALCplus2 EL US


ALCplus2 IDU node node series radio series radio

ELFO radio ALFO radio SDH N+1 radio FAMxc 5 RU Mult. FAMxc 2.5 RU Mult.

ADM-C Multiplexer ADM-1 Multiplexer EXP63 Multiplexer PMP System COMM. SEVER-S

IPBOX WEB Generic

LEGACY equipment

FAM/C-FAM Mult. OLTME Multiplexer G series radio B series radio (Std)

Symbol items: name

The name (or label) is the string of characters displayed under the icon (View area - pag.34) or next to the
icon (Map area - pag.32).

All the objects of the NMS5UX-B system has a name defined on the creation of the object. For all the objects
the name can be modified later.

For the Link objects, it is possible to hide the name (see pag.154/pag.159).

For the Ring objects, the name represents the title of the window opened by the double selection of the
relevant symbol.

For the VLAN Map objects, the name represents a part of the title of the window which is opened on the
double selection of the relevant symbol (window title <VLAN Map object name> - VLAN Manager Map).

Symbol items: check sign

The check sign is an item that characterizes only the Container and Network Element objects, except for
the virtual Network Elements.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 38


For the Network Element objects:
The presence of the check sign points out that:
At least one alarm (current and/or in the alarm history) relevant to the equipment has
not been marked (acknowledged).
To remove the symbol , mark the current alarms (pag.275) and/or in the alarm history
(pag.267).
The LCT program has connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality from
the last time that the Equipment window of the equipment has been opened.
To remove the symbol , open the NE equipment window.
The last operation of Configuration Upload towards the considered equipment is failed or
presents some errors.
The symbol is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of Con-
figuration Upload.

The check sign next to the icon points out that there is at least ONE of the listed condition.
It is possible to check the status of each condition in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] win-
dow (Fig.36) and Information window (Fig.23).

By default, the symbol points out the status of the condition listed above.

It is possible to modify the list of the conditions associating the presence (or absence) of to
two or to only one of the above mentioned conditions. For example, it is possible to associate to
the check sign only the condition of failed Configuration Upload. The change can be made only
by the Superuser. More information is reported in the administrator manual.
The absence of the check sign points out that:
All the (current or historic) alarms of the equipment have been marked.
LCT has not been connected in Configuration modality from the last time that the NE
equipment window has been opened.
The last operation of Configuration Upload to the equipment has been successfully exe-
cuted.

For the Network Element of ALplus Node type or ALCplus2 Node type objects:
The presence of the check sign points out that at least an NE with is present in the node.
The absence of the check sign points out that no equipment with is present in the node.

For the Container objects:


The presence of the check sign points out that at least a NE or Container object with is
present in the relevant container.
The absence of the check sign points out that no NE or Container object with is present in
the relevant container.

Symbol items: notes

The note symbol ( ) is an item that characterizes only the Network Element objects. With details:

The presence of the note symbol points out that there is an informative note written by the user
associated to the symbol.
It is possible to see (modify/delete) the note opening the Information window (Fig.23).
The absence of the note symbol points out that there is no informative note associated to the
symbol.

Symbol characteristics: behavior

The behavior represents the action that is executed when a symbol is selected twice in fast sequence in
Map (pag.32) or View (pag.34) area.
Tab.3 displays for each object the relevant behavior.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 39


Tab.3 Behavior of symbol (UX Map Manager window)

Symbol Behavior (Map/View area)

Container It displays in the View area the objects present in the container (child level)

NE (real) If connected at least once, the equipment window opens (pag.47)

NE ALplus Node type If connected at least once, the ALplus nodal window opens (pag.48)

NE ALCplus2 Node type If connected at least once, the ALCplus2 nodal window opens (pag.49)

The WEB page opens (via the default browser) available at the address set for the
NE WEB Generic type
specific object.

NE (virtual) The equipment window opens (pag.47) *

Generic Symbol No action is executed

Link No action is executed


Label No action is executed

Ring The Ring Manager window (pag.50) opens

VLAN Map The VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51) opens

* For virtual SNMP equipment, the equipment window is opened only if the configuration of a (real or vir-
tual) NE of the same type has been transferred to the considered virtual equipment (see pag.79 and
pag.256).

Symbol characteristics: colour

The colour of the icon identifies the connection status or the alarm status of the symbols contained in it.

Tab.4 displays, for each object, the colours that be assumed by the relevant icon and the description of
the condition represented by them.

Tab.4 Colour of symbol (UX Map Manager window)

Symbol Colour Description

Container * Blue In the container:


There is no equipment in connected status
There is one or more equipment in connected status which the LCT program
in Configuration modality is connected to.
There is one or more equipment in maintenance status.

Green In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has
alarms.

Light blue In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Warning severity is active.

Yellow In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Minor severity is active.

Orange In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Major severity is active.

Red In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 40


Symbol Colour Description

NE (real) ** Brown The equipment is in disconnected status (pag.114)

Green The equipment is in connected status (pag.114) and does not present any alarm.

Light blue The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Warning severity is
present.

Yellow The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Minor severity is
present.

Orange The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Major severity is
present.

Red The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Critical severity is
present.

Red with X The equipment is in unreachable status (pag.115)

Pink *** The equipment is in maintenance status (pag.115)

White *** The LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to the equipment.
NE ALplus Node Brown All the equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has alarm.
Light blue All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Warning.
Yellow All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Minor.
Orange All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Major.
Red All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Critical.
Or
In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.
Red with X All the equipment in the node are in unreachable status.
Pink *** In the node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status.
White *** In the node there is at least one equipment which the LCT program in Configuration
modality is connected to.
NE ALCplus2 Node Brown All the equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has alarm.
Light blue All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Warning.
Yellow All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Minor.
Orange All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Major.
Red All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm
present on the equipment of the node is Critical.
Or
In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.
Red with X All the equipment in the node are in unreachable status.
Pink *** In the node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status.
White *** In the node there is at least one equipment which the LCT program in Configuration
modality is connected to.

NE WEB Generic type Brown The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.

NE (virtual) Brown The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.

Generic Symbol Blue The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.

Link Black The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 41


Symbol Colour Description

Label Black The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.

Ring * Blue In the Ring:


There is no equipment in connected status
There is one or more equipment in connected status which the LCT program
in Configuration modality is connected to.
There is one or more equipment in maintenance status.

Green In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has alarms.

Light blue In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Warning severity is active.

Yellow In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Minor severity is active.

Orange In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Major severity is active.

Red In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one
alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

VLAN Map * Blue In the VLAN Map:


There is no equipment in connected status
There is one or more equipment in connected status which the LCT program
in Configuration modality is connected to.
There is one or more equipment in maintenance status.

Green In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has
alarms.

Light blue In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Warning severity is active.

Yellow In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Minor severity is active.

Orange In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Major severity is active.

Red In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

* By default the color of the icon always reflects the colour of the (contained) object where the most serious
condition is present.
** By default, the colour of the icon always reflects the colour of the most serious alarm present on the
equipment.
*** This condition is not propagated to the icons of the Containers that contain the NE.

Symbol characteristics: right button function

The Map: container (Map level) present in the Map area (pag.32) of the UX Map Manager window is
not provided with the right button function.

Selecting a symbol and pressing the right mouse button, a context menu is displayed where the following
commands are present:

Open. If selected a:
Real NE (connected at least once) opens the equipment window (pag.47).
NE ALplus Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALplus nodal window (pag.48).
NE ALCplus2 Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALCplus2 nodal window
(pag.49).
NE WEB Generic type opens the WEB page (via the default browser) available at the ad-
dress set for the specific object.
Virtual NE opens the equipment window (pag.47).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 42


Container in the View area (pag.34), displays the objects present in the container in the
View area.
Ring opens the Ring Manager window (pag.50).
VLAN Map opens the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).
Command available only if a NE, Container, Ring or VLAN Map object is selected.
Delete. It deletes the selected object (see pag.156).
Modify/View. It displays/modifies the configuration parameters of the object (see pag.157).
Information. It opens the Information window (Fig.23).
Command not available if a Label or Link object is selected.
Equipment Information. It opens the Equipment Information window (Fig.26).
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
NE Current Alarm. It opens the Current Alarm Browser window (Fig.41).
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
NE History Alarm. It opens the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39).
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
Ping. It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected equip-
ment.
Each Ping command sends the test packet three times.
After the selection of the command, the Ping window is displayed, where the operation progress
and the final statistics (number of sent and received packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.)
are displayed.
Command available only if a NE object managed by SNMP protocol is selected.

The heading of the context menu points out the name of the selected symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 43


STATUS BAR

This bar displays:


Name of the currently open map (Map:).
Type of access to the map (Read-Write or Read Only).
Name of the user who opened the map (User:).
Display status of the name of the Link objects. In detail, if:
The wording [Link Label Off] is present, means that the names of the Links are not dis-
played.
The wording [Link Label Off] is present, means that the names of the Links having the
parameter Show Label active are displayed in the View area (see pag.154).

The user (independently from his operating level or from the type of access to the map) can, in
any moment, display/hide the names of the Link objects (see pag.170).

At the opening of the UX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the
display of the names of the Link objects is active (the wording [Link Label Off] is not present).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 44


PLATFORM STATUS BAR

Vertical bar where the following information is displayed. Box:


NMS5UX. Status of the processes relevant to the NMS5UX-B system.
PROXY. Status of the processes which manage the Proxy Agent.
RING. Status of the processes which manage the Ring Manager application.
VLAN. Status of the processes which manage the VLAN Manager application.
Alr History Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the alarms in the table Alarm History of
NMS5UX-B.
Transaction Log Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the list of the operations executed
by the NMS5UX users in the table Transaction Log of NMS5UX-B.

The colour of the NMS5UX, PROXY, RING and VLAN box points out the status of the specific process:
Green. The process is active and operates correctly.
Red. The process is inactive or it does not operate correctly.
In this condition, the function implemented by the process will be not execute (for example, the
alarms or the PM are not collected for the process relevant to NMS5UX).
Call one's network administrator in order to re-activate the process.
Gray. The modules for the management of the relevant processes are not installed.
A double click of the left mouse button on a box allows checking the status of the relevant process.

The colour of the boxes Alr History Usage and Transaction Log Usage points out the occupation status of
the records in the relevant tables with respect to the maximum available status.
The maximum available status, considered as number of records which can be stored in each table, and
the occupation thresholds which determinate the status can be set by the Superuser. With reference to the
default values of the thresholds, the meaning assumed by the status colours are the following:
Green. The records present in the specific table occupy less than 70% of the available space.
Blue. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 70% but less than 75% of the
available space.
Yellow. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 75% but less than 80% of
the available space.
Orange. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 80% but less than 90% of
the available space.
Red. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 90% of the available space.
In this condition a message is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation.
The display of the message and the frequency which it is displayed at can be configured by Su-
peruser. Default: message display active, frequency: 60 seconds.

If during the day the following messages is displayed:


Alarm History occupation exceeded 100%, means that the maximum capacity limit has been
reached for the table Alarm History.
In this case, the table stores all the alarms sent by the equipment (even if the limit has been
exceeded). At midnight, the system will delete, only among the alarms raised and then cleared,
the oldest records.
If the table Alarm History contains all alarms active and not cleared yet, the system will NOT
delete any record, even if their number exceeds the maximum set number.
Transaction Log occupation exceeded 100%, means that the maximum capacity limit has been
reached for the table Transaction Log.
In this case, all the operations will be stored in the table (even if the limit has been exceeded).
At midnight the system will delete the oldest records.

The user (independently from its operating level or access type) anytime, can display or hide the platform
status bar.
At the opening of the UX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the platform status
bar is NOT displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 45


To display/hide the platform status bar

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press .


The platform status bar is displayed.

2. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press again to hide the bar again.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 46


EQUIPMENT WINDOW

The choice of a Network Element object allows accessing to the graphic interface at equipment level, level
represent by the equipment window.
At this level, the user can enter into the equipment to check and modify the configuration parameters, to
execute maintenance and test operations.
Each type of equipment, that can be currently managed by the NMS5UX-B system, is characterized by its
own equipment window.
The detailed description of each single equipment window and of the objects which it contains is reported
in the relevant Equipment user manual (see pag.507).
The management of each single equipment window is made from a specific application, called <equipment
type> Manager. These application are part of the NMS5UX-B system and are provided on request.

The equipment window of a NE can be opened by more users at the same time (see pag.67).
The first user that opens the window can check/modify the configuration parameters (Read-Write access).
The other users can only check the parameters (Read Only access).

What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile. The
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the first
to open it.

In the equipment window with Read Only access, the alarms will not be dynamically updated, it is neces-
sary to require the updating selecting a proper command.

The equipment window can be opened only if the NE has been connected at least once.
What just said is valid only for the objects that represent real equipment.
For the virtual SNMP NEs, the equipment window can be opened after having transferred, at least once,
the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE of the same type to the considered virtual equipment. Instead,
for the virtual Legacy NEs, the equipment can be always opened (see pag.79).

The selection of a NE object of type WEB Generic does not open the equipment window, because this
object does not represent a real equipment (see pag.80).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 47


ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW

The selection of a Network Element object of ALplus Node type allows accessing the graphic interface at
level of ALplus nodal system.
At this level, the user can enter into the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single
equipment constituting the ALplus nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects
in the UX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.
Moreover, it is possible to access to the graphic interface of the single equipment only via the nodal win-
dow. In fact, it is not possible to create in the map a NE object of an equipment which is part of a nodal
system. It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5UX-B system when the ALplus Node NE
object is created.

The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried out at
local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.

The nodal window can be opened:


By one user at a time (see pag.68).
Only if the node (and then all the node equipment) have been connected at least once.

The detailed description of the ALplus nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALplus Node Manager
(see pag.507).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 48


ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW

The selection of a Network Element object of ALCplus2 Node type allows accessing the graphic interface at
level of ALCplus2 nodal system.
At this level, the user can enter into the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single
equipment constituting the ALCplus2 nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE ob-
jects in the UX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.
Moreover, it is possible to access to the graphic interface of the single equipment only via the nodal win-
dow. In fact, it is not possible to create in the map a NE object of an equipment which is part of a nodal
system. It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5UX-B system when the ALCplus2 Node NE
object is created.

The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried out at
local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.

The nodal window can be opened:


By one user at a time (see pag.68).
Only if the node (and then all the node equipment) have been connected at least once.

The detailed description of the ALCplus2 nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALCplus2 Node
Manager (see pag.507).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 49


RING MANAGER WINDOW

The selection of a Ring object allows accessing to the graphic interface of the Ring Manager application:
Ring Manager window.
This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the paths among SDH and PDH
equipment. A Path is a bidirectional connection between a source node and a destination node and is iden-
tified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node.
The Ring Manager application is integrated in the NMS5UX-B system and supports the SNMP equipment
(Network Element) already managed by the supervision system.
The Ring Manager window, relevant to the same Ring object, can be opened by only one user at a time
(see pag.69).
The detailed description of the Ring Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the
relevant user manual (see pag.507).

The Ring Manager application is optional and is provided on demand.


Moreover the Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.374/
pag.375).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 50


VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW

The selection of a VLAN Map object allows accessing to the graphic interface of the VLAN Manager appli-
cation: VLAN Manager Map window.
This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the virtual LAN paths (VLAN path)
among radio equipment with Ethernet tributaries.
The VLAN Manager application is integrated in the NMS5UX-B system and supports the SNMP equipment
(Network Element) of the ALS (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2) and ALFO series
already managed by the supervision system.
The VLAN Manager Map window, relevant to the same VLAN Map object, can be opened by only one user
at a time (see pag.70).
The detailed description of the VLAN Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the
relevant user manual (see pag.507).

The VLAN Manager application is optional and is provided on demand.


Moreover the VLAN Manager Map window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.374/
pag.375).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 51


NMS5UX USERS

The NMS5UX-B graphic interface can be started at the same time on more PCs or terminals connected by
an Ethernet connection.
In this way, the displaying of the information relevant to the equipment network is contemporaneous for
all the terminals and the insertion of the data or the sending of the commands by one user is possible from
all the terminals.

To open a copy of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface, it is necessary to have a NMS5UX user.
The supervision system is provided with a predefined NMS5UX user (see pag.54). In a second moment, it
will be possible to create all the wished NMS5UX users (see pag.374).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 52


RELATION BETWEEN UNIX USER AND NMS5UX USER

The NMS5UX-B system has been developed to be used with the Unix operating system.
For each NMS5UX user you want to create, it is necessary to create a Unix user. There is a specific con-
nection between them: it is possible to associate a single NMS5UX user to a Unix user.
Then, before creating the NMS5UX user, it is necessary to create the relevant Unix user.
The username and the password defined at the creation of the Unix user will be automatically used by the
supervision system during the creation of the NMS5UX user.

It is not necessary to create a Unix user for the Superuser (predefined NMS5UX user provided with the
supervision system - pag.54) because during the installation of the NMS5UX-B system a Unix user with
nms5ux username and password is created, which a NMS5UX user with nms5ux username and password
is associated to.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 53


PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER

During the installation of the system, a NMS5UX user is created with the following characteristics:

Username - nms5ux
Password - nms5ux
map - nms5ux
Profile - Superuser
Timeout password - Not expired
Internet - Active (if required by the user the RAN application (see pag.19).
Ring/VLAN - Active (if required by the user the relevant application: Ring Manager/VLAN Man-
ager (see pag.19).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 54


CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by an username (pag.55), a password (pag.55), a map (pag.56), a
profile (pag.57), the Internet enabling (pag.58) and the Ring/VLAN enabling (pag.58).

The username and the password allow to the system acknowledge the user as NMS5UX user authorized
to start the graphic interface.
The same NMS5UX user can open more NMS5UX-B graphic interfaces (on different PCs/terminals or on the
same) using the same username and password.

A map is associated to each user. The supervision system, at the start-up of the NMS5UX-B interface, au-
tomatically opens the map associated to the user that executed the operation.

The profile allows starting the NMS5UX-B graphic interface and having determinate commands and func-
tions available.

The Internet enabling allows the use of the RAN application (optional) (see pag.19).

The Ring/VLAN enabling allows the use of the (optional) applications Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager
(see pag.19).

Username

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a name.


The name of the NMS5UX-B Superuser is defined during the installation of the system.
The name of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during their creation: the NMS5UX
user is assigned the same name of the Unix user which is associated to.

If for ones system the function of manual Login to the UX Map Manager window is active (pag.61), at
the creation of the NMS5UX user, an username different from that of the relevant Unix user can be defined.
Moreover, in this condition the name of the NMS5UX user can be modified (operation available only for the
Superuser).

Password

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a password.


The password of the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the system.
The password of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during the creation of the
user: the NMS5UX user is assigned the same password of the Unix user which is associated to.

If for ones system the function of manual Login to the UX Map Manager window is active (pag.61), at
the creation of the NMS5UX user the user password must be defined.
Then the Superuser can modify its password and the passwords of all other NMS5UX users. If an user
should forget his password, it is necessary to call SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The privileged, advanced, normal or entry users can modify their own password. If an user should forget
his password, the Superuser can define a new one.

Expiry of the password

The expiry of the password is managed by the operating system Unix according to the modes reported in
the relevant documentation.

Only if, for ones system, the function of manual Login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is ac-
tive, the management of the expiry of the password is executed, only for the NMS5UX users, by the
NMS5UX-B system as described here below.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 55


The NMS5UX-B system manages the periodic password change, which consists in asking the user the
change of his own password each N days (for example, each 6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the system administrator who, if activates the function-
ality, sets the interval between a password change and the next one.
If the functionality is active, 5 days before the expiry of the password, a message is displayed at the open-
ing of the NMS5UX-B interface, which allows the user modifying his own password. In detail, the message:
Your Password is going to expire on <date>. Please change it, signals that ones password is
expiring.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each
time the user will start the interface, until when he changes the password or this one expires.
Password expired. Please change it to login, signals that ones password is expired.
To open the NMS5UX-B interface, it is necessary to change the password.

The activation of the periodic password change does not influence the expiry date of the user, which can
be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent and can coexist at
the same time.

Map

The map corresponds to a network or to the network part graphically represented and managed by the
system. It can be arranged by the user according to his needs.
Each map has its own UX Map Manager (Fig.1).

The NMS5UX-B system can manage more maps at the same time.
The map, where he can operate, is associated to each NMS5UX user.
The access to a map is made via the start of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface: automatically, the system
opens the map associated to the NMS5UX user who required the start of the graphic interface.

It is possible to associate, on the creation of the user, to each NMS5UX user, a map that will constitute the
default map of the user.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can open their own default map and, then, change map
choosing among those managed by the system (see pag.145).
The users with advanced, normal and entry profile can open only one's default map.

On the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created. Then, it will be possible to create a new map
(see pag.374).

More NMS5UX users, who can open and use the map at the same time, can be associated to the same map
(more users can have the same default map).
In this case, only the first user who access to the map will have the Read-Write access, all the other users
will have Read Only access (see pag.63).

What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile. The
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the map, even if they are the first to open it.
The max number of NMS5UX users who can access at the same time to the same map depends on the
codeword required by the customer.

The same NE object can be created in more map and/or more times in the same maps. In this way, on the
creation of the first copy of the object in a map, all the parameters of the object must be set.
On the creation of the successive copies, it will be sufficient to enter the physical or logical address and,
automatically, the system will set the parameter and will associate the status of connection of the twin
object already present in the map.

nms5ux map

During the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created, associated to the Superuser, named
nms5ux (the name of the Superuser can be modified by the user itself).
This map will result the default map of the nms5ux user but, as all the other maps, it can be opened also
by privileged users and be assigned, as default map, to other users.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 56


Profile

The NMS5UX-B system can be started at different operating level.


A group of enabling of commands, execution of operations, etc. corresponds to each level (also called pro-
file).
The profile that characterizes each NMS5UX user is determined on the creation of the user himself.
After his creation, it is possible to modify the profile of each NMS5UX user, except for the Superuser.
The NMS5UX-B system has 5 operating levels (profiles):

Superuser (pag.57)
Privileged (pag.57)
Advanced (pag.57)
Normal (pag.58)
Entry (pag.58)

The availability of the commands of the UX Map Manager window depends on the profile of the NMS5UX
user who opened the map.
Tab.16 point out, for each command, the profile that the NMS5UX user must own to be able to use it.

Superuser

The Superuser can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to all the maps managed by the system.
In each map, the Superuser can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality and can verify/set/
modify all the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the Superuser can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
The NMS5UX-B system manages ONLY one Superuser. It is created during the installation of the system.
In a second moment, it will not be possible to delete the user or modify his profile.

Privileged

The privileged user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to all the maps managed by the
system.
In each map, the privileged user can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the commands/operations available to the privileged user is reported in Tab.16.
The detail of the operations that the privileged user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no privileged user. Then, it is possible to create more privileged
users.

Advanced

The advanced user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his
NMS5UX user (default map).
The advanced user can access to his map both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the commands/operations available to the advanced user is reported in Tab.16.
The detail of the operations that the advanced user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no advanced user. Then, it is possible to create more advanced
users.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 57


Normal

The normal user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his
NMS5UX user (default map).
The normal user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
The detail of the commands/operations available to the normal user is reported in Tab.16.
The detail of the operations that the normal user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.

Entry

The entry user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his
NMS5UX user (default map).
The entry user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
In his map, the user can only verify the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the entry user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.

Internet

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by the Internet option.


Setting this option determines if the user can use the Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) application or not
(see pag.19)
In detail, if the options is:
Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.
Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.

The setting of the Internet option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the
system and depends on the presence or not, in the installation packet, of the RAN application.
The setting of the Internet option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the relevant
user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to modify the setting of the Internet option of any NMS5UX
user (operation available only to the Superuser).

Ring/VLAN

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by the Ring/VLAN option.


The setting of this option determines if the user can use the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager applica-
tion or not (see pag.19)
In detail, if the option is:
Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Ring Manager window (pag.50) and/or VLAN Manager
Map window (pag.51).
Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager Map window.

The setting of the Ring/VLAN option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of
the system and depends on the presence or not of the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager application in
the installation packet.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 58


The setting of the Ring/VLAN option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the rel-
evant user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to modify the setting of the Ring/VLAN option of
any NMS5UX user (operation available only to the Superuser).

The application:
Ring Manager, besides the Ring Manager window, is constituted by a part integrated in the men-
us of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (menu Ring Manager - pag.431).
The use of commands of the Ring Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the
Ring/VLAN option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/VLAN option,
can create, delete, etc. a Ring object.
VLAN Manager, besides the VLAN Manager Map window, is constituted by a part integrated in
the menus of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (menu VLAN Manager - pag.475).
The use of commands of the VLAN Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the
Ring/VLAN option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/VLAN option,
can create, delete, etc. a VLAN Map object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 59


EXPIRY OF A NMS5UX USER (ACCOUNT)

During the creation of a NMS5UX user, it is possible to assign a validity of n days to the relevant user (ac-
count) (see pag.374).

At the expiry of this period, when the NMS5UX-B graphic interface is started, the system displays the mes-
sage Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator.

The displaying of the message forbids the opening of the UX Map Manager windows.
In order to modify ones user or its validity period, contact the Superuser.
If the message is displayed when the Superuser opens the UX Map Manager window, it is necessary to call
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 60


FUNCTION OF MANUAL LOGIN TO THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW

As rule, the username and the password of the Unix user with which the terminal is started, determine
even the NMS5UX user with which the graphical interface NMS5UX-B is started.
In fact, at his creation the NMS5UX user automatically gets the username and the password of the relevant
Unix user.
This involves the user, in order to access the UX Map Manager window, is asked to enter the username and
the password only at the start-up of the terminal (see pag.72).

The NMS5UX-B system manages the function of manual login to the UX Map Manager window.
This function, is active, allows defining, at the creation of the NMS5UX user, a username and a password
different from those defined for the relevant Unix user.
In this case, the user shall enter, at the start-up of the terminal, the username and the password of the
Unix user and, for the start of the UX Map Manager window, will be asked to enter the username and the
password of the NMS5UX user.

The function can be activated on demand when the supervision system is installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 61


FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - USER

The NMS5UX-B system depends on the function Inactivity Check - User.

The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5UX-B
session, before the suspension of this session for inactivity.
Before closing the UX Map Manager window (NMS5UX-B session) due to inactivity, the message INACTIV-
ITY CHECK!! If you dont acknowledge this dialog in x min your session will automatically be closed is dis-
played.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the warning message is displayed on the screen (value x pointed out in the message) can be
configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users.

The function Inactivity Check (User and RW Map) can be activated on demand when the supervision
system is installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 62


ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY)

The NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the same map can be started on more PCs/terminals at the
same time.
In order to avoid conflicts between the graphic interfaces started on different terminals that use the same
map, it is possible to open the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) in two different modalities:
Read-Write. The user who accesses the map in this modality can add, delete, move the sym-
bols contained in the map and modify the characteristics of the symbols.
Read Only. The user who accesses the map in this modality can control the status of the map
and of the contained symbols, but he cannot create, delete or move any symbol or execute any
modification on the symbols.

The map can be opened in Read Only modality by all the user.

The access in Read-Write modality for each map is assigned to one user at a time.
This user corresponds to the first authorized NMS5UX user who opens the NMS5UX-B graphic interface
(then the associated map) on any of the PCs/terminals.
The users who will connect in a second moment to the same map will have the access in Read Only mo-
dality.
The access modality is displayed in the lower bar of the UX Map Manager window.

The map can be opened in Read-Write modality only by the Superuser and by the user with
privileged or advanced profile. A normal or entry user, even if he is the first user that access to
the map, will open the map in Read Only modality.

The availability of the commands of the UX Map Manager window depends on the modality of access to
the map. Tab.16 point out, for each command, the access to the map necessary to use it.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 63


UPDATING OF THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW IN READ ONLY MO-
DALITY

All the changes executed by Read-Write user in a map, are NOT dynamically displayed also in the UX Map
Manager window of the users, who have access to the same map, in Read Only modality.
To update the data of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to select the Map > Refresh (pag.137)
command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 64


PASSING FROM READ ONLY MODALITY TO READ-WRITE MODALITY

If the user, with access to the map of Read-Write type, closes his UX Map Manager window, the Read-Write
access becomes available to all the other users (Read Only) that opened the UX Map Manager window rel-
evant to the same map.
The user who wishes to modify his modality from Read Only to Read-Write must select the Map > Refresh
(pag.137) command.
The first users who executes the updating of the map changes his access from Read Only to Read-Write.

The availability of the Read-Write access is not signalled to the Read Only users.
It is possible to require (pag.380) or force (pag.381) the disconnection of one user, whose access is Read-
Write. If the user accept the request, his map is closed and the Read-Write access will be available.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 65


FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - RW MAP

The NMS5UX-B system is provided with the function Inactivity Check - RW Map.

The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5UX-B
session with Read Write access to the map (see pag.63), before the suspension of this session due to in-
activity.
Before closing the UX Map Manager [Read-Write] window (NMS5UX-B session with access to the RW map)
due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY CHECK!! If you dont acknowledge this dialog in x min your ses-
sion will automatically be closed is displayed.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the RW inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the RW warning message is displayed on the screen (value x pointed out in the message) can
be configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users with Read Write access.

The function Inactivity Check - RW Map can be activated on demand when the supervision system is
installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 66


MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT WINDOW

The equipment window can be opened by more user at the same time.
In this window, the Read-Write access modality is acquired by the first user who opens the window itself
(independently if his access to the map is Read-Write or Read Only).
All the users, who open later the same equipment window, will have the access in Read Only modality.

What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile. The
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the first
to open it.

The closure of the equipment window is not signalled on video.

It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the equipment window in Read-Write modality, but
it is possible to require (pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 67


MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE NODAL WINDOW

The nodal window (ALplus or ALCplus2) can be opened by one user at the same time.

It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the nodal window, but it is possible to require
(pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 68


MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE RING MANAGER WINDOW

The Ring Manager window relevant to the same Ring object can be opened by only one user at a time.

Instead more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time.

It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible to require
(pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 69


MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW

The Ring Manager window relevant to the same Ring object can be opened by only one user at a time.

Instead more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time.

It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible to require
(pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 70


PROCEDURES

START-UP/CLOSING OF NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL IN-


TERFACE (LOGIN/LOGOUT)

The first time that the NMS5UX-B graphic interface starts, after the installation of the system, refer to the
First start-up of the NMS5UX-B interface procedure (pag.75).

The next times, refer to the Start-up of the NMS5UX-B interface procedure (pag.72).

The start-up of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface corresponds to the opening of the UX Map Manager
window (Fig.1).

It is possible to start more NMS5UX-B interfaces on more machines or on the same machine.

The maximum number of NMS5UX-B graphic interfaces that can be started at the same time depends on
the codeword required by the user.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 71


START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE

The following procedure presumes that the NMS5UX-B system has been already installed on the ma-
chine and that the processes necessary for the start-up of the interface. The procedure for the installation
and the start-up of the NMS5UX-B system is reported in the administrator manual.
It is supposed that the Unix user and the corresponding NMS5UX user, which you wish to use for the start-
up of the interface, have been created.

1. Start the machine up (pc, terminal, etc.).


The login window of the Unix operating system opens.

2. Type the name and the password of the Unix user in the relevant box.
If you have two or more Unix users, use the name/password of the Unix user associated to the NMS5UX
user that you wish to use to open the map.
3. Press the confirmation push-button.
If the typed data are correct, one's Unix operating system is started-up.

4. Open a terminal window.

5. On the command line, type:


cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu

6. Press Enter.
The TMNMENU window opens (Fig.4).

7. Double click on the icon:


NMS5UX Application Login, to start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface.
If the user, used to start the interface, has profile:
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user to access the default map rele-
vant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user to access to the default map
relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.
NMS5UX Application Login R/O, to start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface; the default map, rel-
evant to one's user, is opened in Read Only modality.

The Login window opens and then the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) opens with the default map
associated to its user.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can change the map anytime (pag.145).
If the system displays the Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator message,
one's account is expired. Contact the Superuser to set a new user or modify the current validity period.

If the function of Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, in the Login window
it is necessary to:

a. Type the username of one's NMS5UX user into the Login box.
If you have two or more NMS5UX users, type the username of the NMS5UX user associated to
the Unix user used to start the operating system.
b. Type the password of the NMS5UX user into the Password box.
c. Press OK.
The UX Map Manager window opens with the default map associated to its user.
If the system displays the message:
Incorrect Login, the typed name of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Password, the typed password of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Unix User, the used NMS5UX user is not compatible with the Unix user used for
the start-up of the operating system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 72


Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, one's password is expiring.
To change it:
Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, mini-
mum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If the Cancel push-button is pressed, the password is not changed and the UX Map Man-
ager window opens. On the next start of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface, the window for
the change of the password will be displayed again.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be dis-
played each time the user starts the graphic interface until the user changes the pass-
word or this one expires.
Password expired. Please change it to login, one's password is expired. To change it:
Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, mini-
mum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If the Cancel push-button is pressed, the password is not changed and the UX Map Man-
ager window opens. To change the password and start the graphic interface, execute the
procedure of step 7 again.

If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login, Wrong Password or Wrong Unix User message
is displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the
graphic interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 7.

The Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it and Password expired. Please
change it to login message are displayed ONLY if the periodical password change functionality
IS ACTIVE. It consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for ex-
ample each 6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the Superuser, who, if he activates the func-
tionality, sets the interval between a password change and the successive one.
The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date of the user,
which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent
and can coexist at the same time.

Fig.4 TMNMENU window

Icons for the


start of the
NMS5UX-B
graphic
interface (1)

Icons for the


management of
the database and
of the NMS5UX-B
platform (2)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 73


Fig.4 notes

(1) The selection of the icon:


NMS5UX Application Login, allows starting the NMS5UX-B graphic interface.
If the user used to start the interface has profile:
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only mo-
dality.
NMS5UX-B Application Login R/O, allows starting the NMS5UX-B graphic interface; the de-
fault map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.

(2) The description and the use of these icons is reported in the administrator manual of the NMS5UX-
B system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 74


FIRST START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE

The following procedure supposes that the NMS5UX-B system has been already installed on the ma-
chine and that the processes necessary to the start-up of the interface have been already activated. The
procedure for the installation and the start-up of the NMS5UX-B system is reported in the administrator
manual.

1. Start-up the machine (PC, terminal, etc.).


The login window of the Unix operating system opens.
2. Type the name of the Unix user: nms5ux.

3. Type the password of the Unix user: nms5ux.

4. Press the confirmation push-button.


If the typed data are correct, one's Unix operating system is started.

5. Open a terminal window.

6. At the command line, type:


cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu

7. Press Enter.
The TMNMENU window opens (Fig.4).

8. Double click on the NMS5UX Application Login.


The Login window opens and then the The UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) opens with the nms5ux
map, which is empty if the system has not been pre-configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The NMS5UX user, which the graphic interface has been started with, is assigned with the Superuser.
AS first operation, it is suggested to modify the password associated to this user (pag.375).

If the function of Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, in the Login window
it is necessary to:

a. Type, in the Login box, the name of the user: nms5ux.


b. Type, in the Password box, the user password: nms5ux.
c. Press OK.
The UX Map Manager window opens with the nms5ux map.
The displaying of the Incorrect Login message points out that the typed name or password are
incorrect. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login message is displayed for three times con-
secutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the graphic interface, it is neces-
sary to execute again the procedure of the step 7.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 75


CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE

The closure of the NMS5UX-B graphical interface corresponds to the closing of the UX Map Manager window
(see pag.147).

The closure of the UX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open win-
dow of NMS5UX-B (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 76


AUTOMATIC CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE

The UX Map Manager window is automatically closed when:

The system displays the WARNING!! Forced Logout from Superuser message. The Superuser
user has forced the disconnection of the user from the map (see pag.381).
The user closes the operation system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 77


GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION

After the installation of the NMS5UX-B system, it is necessary to represent the network graphically.

The network configuration can be executed both by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA and by the user. If the net-
work has been configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA, pass to the equipment connection (pag.108). In-
stead, if the network must be represented, follow the indication reported below.

The network representation is made using a series of predefined objects (see pag.79).

To create them, some general rules pointed out at pag.82 must be respected.

The creation of the objects can be executed using:

Specific commands - Edit > Add menu (pag.85)


Add Network From File functionality (pag.97)
Auto Discovery functionality (pag.104)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 78


OBJECTS PRE-DEFINED FOR THE NETWORK REPRESENTATION

The pre-defined objects, available to the user for the network graphic representation, are:
Container objects (pag.79)
Network Element (NE) objects (pag.79)
Generic Symbol objects (pag.81)
Link objects (pag.81)
Label objects (pag.81)
Ring objects (pag.81)
VLAN Map objects (pag.81)

Container objects

These objects are used as containers of equipment, symbols or other containers.


No special meaning is assigned by NMS5UX-B to these objects. They have been introduced to help the user
to arrange the network to rapidly locate the equipment.
In fact the Container objects allow having a better overview of the network, as they allow grouping the
items according to criteria that can be geographical or simply logical, for example they group equipment
that belong to the same department or are located in the same area.

The Container objects can be compared to the directories in the arrangement of the files on a PC.

Network Element objects

These objects are used to identify the real or virtual equipment: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, etc.

Real NE

Real equipment (SNMP or Legacy) means those objects that have the corresponding equipment physically
present in the network.

A real NE is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX-B system when the relevant object is created,
but it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is when the created NE is already present in a map
and it is in connected status; in this case, the NE just after its creation acquires the condition of the same
symbol present in the other map.

Virtual NE

Virtual equipment means those objects that have not the corresponding equipment physically present in
the network.
Depending on the type of protocol used to manage the equipment, the configuration of a virtual NE changes
as pointed out here below.

Virtual equipment (SNMP)

When a virtual SNMP equipment is created, its configuration database is empty.


In order to configure a virtual SNMP equipment, it is necessary to copy the configuration of an equipment
of the same type (real or virtual with an already configured database) to the virtual equipment just created
by means of the command SNMP-Configuration Download (pag.256).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 79


Select the symbol of the virtual SNMP NE to open the relevant equipment window and set the configuration
parameters, the user inputs, the user outputs, the control parameters for the PM measures, etc. More in-
formation are reported in the equipment Manual.
Then the configuration of the virtual SNMP equipment can be transferred, always by means of the com-
mand SNMP-Configuration Download, to any equipment compatible with the considered virtual equip-
ment.

Virtual equipment (Legacy)

When a virtual Legacy equipment is created, its configuration database is empty.


In order to configure a virtual Legacy equipment, it is necessary to select the symbol of the virtual Legacy
NE. The equipment window is displayed. Set the parameters and, then, by means of a specific command
present in the equipment graphic interface, transfer the new configuration of the virtual NE to other (real
or virtual) equipment of the same type.
For some equipment types, when the symbol is selected, before opening the equipment window, a window
is displayed where the general parameters of the virtual NE you wish to configure can be defined, for ex-
ample the type of IDU or the number/type of tributaries.
More information are reported in the equipment Manual.

NE of ALplus Node type

With NE object of ALplus Node type we do not mean a single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and max-
imum 3 ALplus equipment (nodal matrix) interconnected by Nodal Bus (Node).
These equipment are not managed one by one by the NMS5UX-B system, but are managed as a set rep-
resented by the object of ALplus Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the net-
work but works as container for the equipment of the nodal system.

The equipment of a node are not automatically managed by the NMS5UX-B system when the relevant
ALplus Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect them. The only exception is if the created
node is already present in a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will auto-
matically acquire the condition of the same ALplus Node symbol present in the other map.

NE of ALCplus2 Node type

With NE object of ALCplus2 Node type we do not mean a single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and
maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traf-
fic). (Node).
These equipment are not managed one by one by the NMS5UX-B system, but are managed as a set rep-
resented by the object of ALCplus2 Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the
network but works as container for the equipment of the nodal system.

The equipment of a node are not automatically managed by the NMS5UX-B system when the relevant
ALCplus2 Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect them. The only exception is if the created
node is already present in a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will auto-
matically acquire the condition of the same ALCplus2 Node symbol present in the other map.

NE tipo WEB Generic

This object is used to identify equipment, not managed by NMS5UX-B, which are provided with a WEB man-
agement interface.
In fact, these objects can be assigned an IP address and a NSAP address (as for the creation of a normal
SNMP NE to manage with the NMS5UX-B system). Selecting them, however, starts the default system
browser with the WEB page, available at the set address, active.
These objects were born in never connected (disconnected) status and their status do not change for the
rest of their life because, differently from other NE objects, the objects of WEB Generic type must not be
connected to start the connection.
In fact, for this type of object, not all the commands available for the NE objects are meaningful, for ex-
ample Connect, Disconnect, Network Alarm History, etc.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 80


Generic Symbol objects

These objects are used to graphically represent elements present in the network as, for example: pc, mo-
dem, etc.

The Generic Symbol objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow managing
the physical element which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.

Link objects

These objects are used to graphically represent a connection between two objects.

The Link objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow managing the con-
nections, which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.

Label objects

These objects are used to type a text string into the map.

Ring objects

These objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment, managed by the NMS5UX-B
system, which implement Paths.
The selection of a Ring object allows accessing to the relevant graphic interface represented by the Ring
Manager window (pag.50).
The use of the Ring Manager window is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.507).

VLAN Map objects

These objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Ethernet tributary, managed by
the NMS5UX-B system, which implement virtual LAN paths (VLAN path).
The selection of a VLAN Map object allows accessing to the relevant graphic interface represented by the
VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).
The use of the VLAN Manager Map window is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.507).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 81


RULES FOR THE CREATION OF THE OBJECTS

All the predefined objects must be created by the user.


It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects anytime.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps (see pag.21).
The objects of a map can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map (see pag.140).

To avoid contemporaneous operations on the same object, only one user at a time can change the network
configuration in a map. This one has the access to the map in Read-Write modality: Read-Write user.

More users can access to the map at the same time. Only the Read-Write user can modify the network
configuration. The changes made by the Read-Write user are not dynamically displayed by the Read Only
users.
To update the information of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to update the UX Map Manager
window selecting the Map > Refresh command.

Besides the general instructions described above, for some objects the rules described here below must
be respected.

NE objects

It is possible to create all the equipment in a network in a single map or to subdivide the network in two
or more parts and to associate two or more maps to these parts.
In this case, at the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to this map will be visible
and manageable.

A NE object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that an equipment is
present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the already
existing object. For example, if the NE-1 symbol in connected status is present in the map A, when the NE-
1 symbol (same IP/Physical address) is created in the map B, the symbol will result connected as it inherits
the status of the twin symbol.

The same NE object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.

It is possible to create new NE objects even if these have not been physically installed in the network, for
example because they are foreseen for a future installation. In this case, it will be possible to open the
relevant equipment window only after the first connection; then, only after the equipment has been phys-
ically installed in the network and has been connected.
It is, instead, possible to create virtual NE objects, that is objects not having a corresponding equipment
present in the network, but which can be configured as a normal NE. Then this configuration can be trans-
ferred to any (real or virtual) equipment compatible with the virtual NE (see pag.79).
The NE objects of WEB Generic type (see pag.80), after their creation, do not require any operation (line
test, connection) to be used.

NE objects of ALplus Node type

For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
Before creating an ALplus Node object, it is necessary that the ALplus node* has been already
defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/LMT
application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
* The ALplus node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus equipment with
nodal matrix interconnected by Nodal Bus.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 82


If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of an equipment belonging to a node is supported by the
NMS5UX-B system only through the relevant nodal window.
After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map yet.
During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.

As general rule for the node management.


All the commands, present in the map menu and executed selecting the node, are automatically executed
for all the equipment composing the node (for example Connect, Disconnect, etc.). Instead, the command
not available in the map menu but available in the nodal window are executed selecting the single equip-
ment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition present
in the equipment composing the node.

NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type

For the NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
Before creating an ALCplus2 Node object, it is necessary that the ALCplus2 node* has been al-
ready defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/
LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
* The ALCplus2 node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment
interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic)
If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of an equipment belonging to a node is supported by the
NMS5UX-B system only through the relevant nodal window.
After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map yet.
During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.

As general rule for the node management.


All the commands, present in the map menu and executed selecting the node, are automatically executed
for all the equipment composing the node (for example Connect, Disconnect, etc.). Instead, the command
not available in the map menu but available in the nodal window are executed selecting the single equip-
ment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition present
in the equipment composing the node.

Container objects

The container map windows allow subdividing the network into hierarchical levels in such a way that it is
possible to arrive from a general view to the displaying of the single elements, passing through interme-
diate levels.
In fact the network, made by the objects that the supervision system must manage and control, can be
considered from different points of view.
It can be observed taken as a whole, as distribution of elements in a geographical area (for example sub
networks), or you can decide to study a single object to see its configuration; the user can decide at which
level, and then which detail, to access to the network information. In this way, subdividing the network in
containers, it is possible to easily pass from a general overview to a more and more detailed view.
The user is totally free in the creation of the number and type of levels that better fits to the structure of
one's network.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 83


Ring objects

A Ring object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a Ring is present
in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration of
the already existing object.
For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol Ring-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A, NE-B
and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links, when the Ring1 symbol (same physical address) is created in the
map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links will result configured in the sym-
bol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.

The same Ring object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
The commands for the creation/modification/deletion of the Ring objects are present in the Ring Manager
(pag.431) menu.
The menu is present in the UX Map Manager window only if the Ring Manager application, optional and
provided on demand, is installed.

VLAN Map objects

A VLAN Map object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a VLAN Map
is present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created VLAN Map symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration
of the already existing object.
For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol VLAN Map-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A,
NE-B and NE-C and the relevant VLAN paths/Links, when the VLAN Map1 symbol (same physical address)
is created in the map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant VLAN paths/Links will result
configured in the symbol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.

The same VLAN Map object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
The commands for the creation/modification/deletion of the VLAN Map objects are present in the VLAN
Manager (pag.475) menu.
The menu is present in the UX Map Manager window only if the VLAN Manager application, optional and
provided on demand, is installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 84


OBJECTS CREATION - EDIT MENU

By means of the commands available in the UX Map Manager window, it is possible to create all pre-defined
objects available in the NMS5UX-B system.
In detail for the creation of the objects:
Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Link and Label use the Edit > Add menu (pag.149).
Ring use the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring command (pag.432).
VLAN Map use the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map command (pag.476).

Here below a series of examples of graphic representation of a hypothetic network in one or more maps,
using the commands of Edit menu, is reported.

Examples of network graphical representation

Let us suppose to have to graphically display a certain Italia network in such a way to be able to execute
its supervisory operations by means of the NMS5UX-B system.
According to the equipment type present into his own network, the user has to refer to the specific exam-
ple:
Network composed by SNMP equipment (pag.85).
Network composed by Legacy equipment (pag.88).
Network composed by Legacy equipment and SNMP equipment one (pag.91).

Into the example described here below, the entire equipment network will be displayed into the same
map and it is assumed that such a map has already been created.
It is possible to subdivide the equipment network into two or more parts and to couple to such parts two
or more maps. In this case at the opening of each map, it will be visible, and it will be possible to manage
it, only the part of the network coupled with the map under examination. An example is pointed out to
pag.95.

Network composed by SNMP equipment

The Italia network shown in Fig.5, is composed by Radio SDH, Radio PDH and PMP equipment.
The NMS5UX-B loaded on a Workstation connected to an equipment by means of an Ethernet LAN.
A specific IP address has been locally assigned to each equipment by means of LCT.

Fig.5 Example of network (SNMP equipment)

Lan

Radio SDH Radio PDH Equipment


10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 type
PMP
10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
Radio PDH Local IP address
10.10.10.21 of the
10.10.10.31
equipment

Radio SDH Radio PDH


10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32

Radio PDH
10.10.10.33

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 85


Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equi-
pment is connected and where they are located on the field.
Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the Italia network equipment have been created into the
same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the indi-
cation reported to pag.95.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.6.

Fig.6 Subdivision of the network into objects (SNMP equipment)

Italia
(map)

Nord Italia
(container) 1

Milano
(container) 3

Sud Italia
Torino (container) 2
(container) 4
Lan
9 5

Radio SDH Radio PDH


10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 12

10
PMP
6 10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
10.10.10.21 Radio PDH
10.10.10.31
11
7
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32

Radio PDH
10.10.10.33

In Fig.6, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is pos-
sible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic
reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name
of the symbol of the container.
An IP address and a logical address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE
object. ONLY if the equipment are inserted into an OSI network, it will be necessary to set also the NSAP
(Gosip) address of the equipment.
The IP Address and the possible NSAP (Gosip) Address, have to coincide with the IP Address and the NSAP
(Gosip) Address locally set (by means of the LCT program) for the relevant equipment. If the values do
not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign
a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment.

Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during the
creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374).
Open the UX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (pag.72).
Now proceed in the creation of the objects (pag.149).
In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.

During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example
NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia.
Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 86


In Fig.6, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia
network can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right
corner.

In Tab.5, for each object present in Fig.6 and identified by a number, some information is reported that
allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the
type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and
in which container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible
creation order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects con-
tained in them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.

In Tab.5 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.

Tab.5 Subdivision of the network into objects (SNMP equipment)

Type of object that Container where the ob- Setting of the values of the
Object
must be created ject must be created main parameters

1 Container Italia * Label: Nord Italia


2 Container Italia * Label: Sud Italia
3 Container Nord Italia Label: Milano
4 Container Nord Italia Label: Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.30
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: PDH 30 **
5 Milano
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.31
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: PDH 31 **
6 Milano
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.32
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: PDH 32 **
7 Milano
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.33
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: PDH 33 **
8 Milano
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: SDH 20 **
9 Torino
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: SDH 21 **
10 Torino
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: SDH 22 **
11 Torino
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.40
Network Element > SNMP
12 Sud Italia Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Managed
Type: PMP

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.
*** Set the NSAP (Gosip) Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network.

The creation of an object implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on video.
By means of the Container symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment
is contained, for example as shown in Fig.7, for the PMP 40 equipment of the Italia network.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 87


Fig.7 Example of network (SNMP equipment) (UX Map Manager window)

Now the NMS5UX-B system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when
it will be connected.

Network composed by Legacy equipment

The Italia network shown in Fig.8, is composed by FAM, OLTME and G series Radio type equipment.
The NMS5UX-B system is loaded on a Workstation which, by means of Ethernet LAN, is connected to a
CommServer-S and a IPBOX.
The physical address has been locally assigned by means of LOM, to each equipment. The IP Address has
been locally assigned to the CommServer-S and IPBOX.

The CommServer-S and IPBOX need for defining the connection line that physically couples each single
equipment, managed by means of the Legacy protocol, to the supervisory system.

Fig.8 Example of network (Legacy equipment)

IP-BOX CommServer-S

143.1.1.1 143.1.1.2 IP Address


Lan Lan
2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Serial ports
RS232

RS232

RS485

Equipment
type
Radio FAM Oltme
10 6 21
RS232

Equipment
RS485
local address

Radio FAM FAM


11 8 7
EOC

Radio
12

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 88


Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equi-
pment is connected and where they are located on the field.
Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the Italia network equipment have been created into the
same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the indi-
cation reported to pag.95.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.9.

Fig.9 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy equipment)

Italia
(map)
Nord Italia Sud Italia
(container) 1 (container) 2

Milano
(container) 3

5 9

IP-BOX CommServer-S
143.1.1.1 143.1.1.2
2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10
Palermo
(container) 11 Oltme
6 21
12
Radio FAM
Torino
(container) 4
10 6

8 7 14 13
Radio Radio FAM FAM
12 11 8 7

In Fig.9, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is pos-
sible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic
reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name
of the symbol of the container.
An physical or IP address (NE objects: Comm.Server and IPBOX) and a logical address, different for each
created NE object, have been assigned to each NE object.
The physical/IP address, has to coincide with the address locally set (by means of the LOM/LCT program)
for the relevant equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection
with the equipment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign
a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment.

To each NE object, during its creation, it is necessary to couple all the information necessary to allow the
equipment reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the Comm. Server-S or of the IPBOX and the
number of the used port.

For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port, it has to be set the IP Address of the Com-
mServer/IPBOX and the number of the port to which it is connected the equipment installed upstream of
the equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself.

The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of EOC or
other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains.

Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during the
creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374).
Open the UX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (pag.72).
Now proceed in the creation of the objects (pag.149).
In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 89


During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example
NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia.
Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on.

In Fig.9, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia
network can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right
corner.

In Tab.6, for each object present in Fig.9 and identified by a number, some information is reported that
allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the
type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and
in which container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible
creation order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects con-
tained in them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.

In Tab.6 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.

Tab.6 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy equipment)

Type of object that Container where the ob- Setting of the values of the
Object
must be created ject must be created main parameters

1 Container Italia * Label: Nord Italia


2 Container Italia * Label: Sud Italia
3 Container Nord Italia Label: Milano
4 Container Nord Italia Label: Torino
IP Address: 143.1.1.1
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: IPBOX **
5 Milano
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: IPBOX
Physical Address: 10
Logical Address: Radio 10 **
Network Element > Lega-
6 Milano CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.1
cy Protocol Managed
CS/IPBOX Port: 2
Type: Radio G
Physical Address: 11
Logical Address: Radio 11 **
Network Element > Lega-
7 Milano CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.1
cy Protocol Managed
CS/IPBOX Port: 2
Type: Radio G
Physical Address: 12
Logical Address: Radio 12 **
Network Element > Lega-
8 Torino CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.1
cy Protocol Managed
CS/IPBOX Port: 2
Type: Radio G
IP Address: 143.1.1.2
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: CS **
9 Sud Italia
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Comm. Server
Physical Address: 21
Logical Address: Oltme 21 **
Network Element > Lega-
10 Sud Italia CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS/IPBOX Port: 8
Type: Oltme
11 Container Sud Italia Label: Palermo
Physical Address: 6
Logical Address: FAM 6 **
Network Element > Lega-
12 Palermo CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS/IPBOX Port: 2
Type: Fam

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 90


Type of object that Container where the ob- Setting of the values of the
Object
must be created ject must be created main parameters

Physical Address: 7
Logical Address: FAM 7 **
Network Element > Lega-
13 Palermo CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS/IPBOX Port: 2
Type: Fam
Physical Address: 8
Logical Address: FAM 8 **
Network Element > Lega-
14 Palermo CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS/IPBOX Port: 2
Type: Fam

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.
*** Set the NSAP (Gosip) Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network.

The creation of an object implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on video.
By means of the Container symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment
is contained, for example as shown in Fig.10, for the Radio 12 equipment of the Italia network.

Fig.10 Example of network (Legacy equipment) (UX Map Manager window)

Now the NMS5UX-B system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when
it will be connected.

Network composed by Legacy equipment and SNMP equipment

The Italia network shown in Fig.11, is composed by equipment managed with Legacy protocol (FAM) and
equipment managed with SNMP protocol (Radio SDH).
The NMS5UX-B system is loaded on a Workstation that is connected, by means of Ethernet LAN, to a Com-
mServer-S and to the equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 91


To each equipment, it has been locally assigned the specific address (physical/IP) by means of LOM/LCT.

The CommServer-S need for defining the connection line that physically couples each single equipment,
managed by means of the Legacy protocol, to the supervisory system.

Fig.11 Example of network (Legacy/SNMP equipment)

CommServer-S

143.1.1.2 IP Address
Lan Lan
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Serial ports

RS232

RS485
Radio SDH Equipment
10.10.10.20 type
FAM FAM
Radio SDH 6 9
10.10.10.21 Equipment
RS485
local address

Radio SDH FAM FAM


10.10.10.22 8 7

Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equi-
pment is connected and where they are located on the field.
Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the Italia network equipment have been created into the
same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the indi-
cation reported to pag.95.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.12.

Fig.12 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy/SNMP equipment)

Italia
(map)
Nord Italia Sud Italia
(container) 1 (container) 2

Torino
(container) 3

CommServer-S
143.1.1.2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4

Radio SDH 8
10.10.10.20 Palermo
(container) 9 FAM
5
9
10

Radio SDH FAM


10.10.10.21 6

6
12 11
Radio SDH FAM FAM
10.10.10.22 8 7

In Fig.12, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is pos-
sible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic
reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name
of the symbol of the container.
To each NE object, the system has assigned a physical address (IP Address for the SNMP equipment and
physical address with the Legacy equipment) and a logic one different for each created NE object. ONLY if
the equipment are inserted into an OSI network, it will be necessary to set also the NSAP (Gosip) address
of the equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 92


The physical/IP/NSAP address, has to coincide with the address locally set (by means of the LOM/LCT pro-
gram) for the relevant equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the con-
nection with the equipment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign
a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment.

To each NE object, during its creation, it is necessary to couple all the information necessary to allow the
equipment reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the Comm. Server-S and the number of the
used port.

For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port, it has to be set the IP Address of the Com-
mServer and the number of the port to which it is connected the equipment installed upstream of the
equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself.

The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of EOC or
other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains.

Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during the
creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374).
Open the UX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (pag.72).
Now proceed in the creation of the objects (pag.149).
In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.
During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example
NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia.
Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on.

In Fig.12, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia
network can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right
corner.
In Tab.7, for each object present in Fig.12 and identified by a number, some information is reported that
allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the
type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and
in which container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible
creation order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects con-
tained in them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.
In Tab.7 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.

Tab.7 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy/SNMP equipment)

Type of object that Container where the ob- Setting of the values of the
Object
must be created ject must be created main parameters
1 Container Italia * Label: Nord Italia
2 Container Italia * Label: Sud Italia
3 Container Nord Italia Label: Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: SDH 20 **
4 Torino
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: **
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: SDH 21 **
5 Torino
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: SDH 22 **
6 Torino
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 143.1.1.2
Network Element > SNMP Logical Address: CS **
7 Sud Italia
Managed NSAP (Gosip) Address: ***
Type: Comm. Server

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 93


Type of object that Container where the ob- Setting of the values of the
Object
must be created ject must be created main parameters
Physical Address: 9
Logical Address: Fam 9 **
Network Element > Lega-
8 Sud Italia CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS Port: 8
Type: Fam
9 Container Sud Italia Label: Palermo
Physical Address: 6
Logical Address: FAM 6 **
Network Element > Lega-
10 Palermo CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS Port: 2
Type: Fam
Physical Address: 7
Logical Address: FAM 7 **
Network Element > Lega-
11 Palermo CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS Port: 2
Type: Fam
Physical Address: 8
Logical Address: FAM 8 **
Network Element > Lega-
12 Palermo CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2
cy Protocol Managed
CS Port: 2
Type: Fam

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.
*** Set the NSAP (Gosip) Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network.

The creation of an object implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on video.
By means of the Container symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment
is contained, for example as shown in Fig.13, for the FAM 9 equipment of the Italia network.

Fig.13 Example of network (Legacy/SNMP equipment) (UX Map Manager window)

Now the NMS5UX-B system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when
it will be connected.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 94


Network subdivided into more maps

In this example, we suppose that the Italia network (Fig.5) is subdivided and graphically represented in
two map, in such a way that at the opening of the map only the part of network associated to the specific
map will be visible and manageable.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.14.

Fig.14 Example of network subdivided in more maps

Nord Italia
(map)

Milano
(container) 1

Sud Italia
Torino (map)
(container) 2
Lan
7 3

Radio SDH Radio PDH


10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 10

8 PMP
4 10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
10.10.10.21 Radio PDH
10.10.10.31
9 5
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32

Radio PDH
10.10.10.33

In Fig.14, a name identifying a geographical area or town has been associated to the maps and to the con-
tainers. It is possible to assign any name to the maps and to the Container objects, but it is suggested to
set a name that has a geographical reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of
the equipment just from the name of the map and of the container symbol.
An IP address and a logic address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE.
The IP Address must coincide with the locally set IP Address (via LCT program) for the relevant equipment.
If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container object, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a
name that makes easy the acknowledging of the equipment.

Now proceed in the following way:

1. Create the Nord Italia and Sud Italia maps.


Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during
the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374).

2. Open the UX Map Manager window with a user, which the Nord Italia map is associated to (pag.72).

3. Create some objects (pag.149).


In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.
During the operation, a specific order must be followed as it is not possible to create an object, for ex-
ample NE, if before the Container object that must contain it has not been created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Milano and Torino.
Then, open the Milano container and create the objects present in it, and so on.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 95


In Fig.14, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the
Nord Italia map can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the
upper right corner.
In Tab.8, for each object present in Fig.14 and identified by a number, some information is reported
that allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication
of the type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the
object and in which container the symbols must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects list
reflects a possible creation order that ensures the creation of the Container objects before the creation
of the objects which these must contain.
The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.
In Tab.8 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.

4. Close the Nord Italia map.

5. Open the UX Map Manager window with an user which the Sud Italia map is associated to.

6. Create the objects as displayed in Tab.8.

At the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to the open map will be visible and
manageable.
It is possible to create a NE symbol in two different maps. In this case, it is necessary to create the symbol
in both the map, assigning to it the same characteristics (IP address, type, etc.). At the creation of the
second symbol, given that the object is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status
of the already existing twin symbol.

Tab.8 Objects of a network subdivided in more maps

Map where the Type of object Container where


Setting of the values of the
Object object must be that must be the object must
main parameters
created created be created

1 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Milano


2 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Torino
3 Nord Italia Network Element > Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.30
SNMP Managed Logical Address: PDH 30 **
Type: Radio PDH
4 Nord Italia Network Element > Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.31
SNMP Managed Logical Address: PDH 31 **
Type: Radio PDH
5 Nord Italia Network Element > Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.32
SNMP Managed Logical Address: PDH 32 **
Type: Radio PDH
6 Nord Italia Network Element > Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.33
SNMP Managed Logical Address: PDH 33 **
Type: Radio PDH
7 Nord Italia Network Element > Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.20
SNMP Managed Logical Address: SDH 20 **
Type: Radio SDH
8 Nord Italia Network Element > Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.21
SNMP Managed Logical Address: SDH 21 **
Type: Radio SDH
9 Nord Italia Network Element > Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.22
SNMP Managed Logical Address: SDH 22 **
Type: Radio SDH
10 Sud Italia Network Element > Sud Italia * IP Address: 10.10.10.40
SNMP Managed Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Type: PMP

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 96


OBJECTS CREATION - ADD NETWORK FROM FILE FUNCTIONALITY

The Add Network From File functionality allows automatically adding a group of predefined objects whose
characteristics have been edited in a file (csv format) to a map of the NMS5UX-B system.

The predefined objects, which can be automatically created by the considered functionality, are:
Container objects (pag.79)
Network Element objects (pag.79) managed with the SNMP protocol
Link objects (pag.81)
Label objects (pag.81)

The use of the functionality is structured in the following phases:

1. To create the file in csv format (pag.97).

2. To copy the file (.csv) to the server where the NMS5UX-B system is installed (default directory opt/
nms5ux/data/files).
The file must be transferred in ASCII format.

3. To open the UX Map Manager window:


Relevant to the map defined in the file (pag.99).
The map must be opened in Read-Write mode.
With a user whose profile is Advanced, Privileged or Superuser.

4. To open the file (.csv) by means of the Edit > Add > Network From File command.
Opening the file involves the automatic creation of the objects in the UX Map Manager window.
At the end of the operation, the result of the creation is pointed out for each object.
The use of the Network From File command is pointed out at (pag.155).

At pag.101 an example is reported of complete use of the Add Network From File functionality.

To create the file in csv format

The Add Network From File functionality supports files in csv format with a predefined structure.

The user can create the file in the wished mode, but always respecting:
The format (.csv)
The file structure described at pag.97.
The rules for the compilation of the file, pointed out at pag.99.

At pag.100 the procedure for the creation of the csv file, starting from a model in xls format, is reported.

Structure of the csv file

Tab.9 points out the structure of a row of csv file. The column:
Parameter, displays the fields of the row.
According to the csv format, each field is separated from the next one by the character ";".
Possible values, displays the valid values.
Entering a different value or a value not in compliance with what displayed prevents the creation
of the object.

Fig.17 shows an example of structure of a csv file opened by a text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 97


Tab.9 File structure (Add Network From File functionality)

Parameter Possible values

Category If you wish to create an object:


(Category of the object Label, type 1 or LABEL
you wish to create) Container, type 2 or CONTAINER
NE managed with the SNMP protocol, type 3 or NE
Link, type 100 or LINK
Type The possible values for this parameter change depending on the value set for the
Category parameter.
(Type of object, within the
category, you wish to cre- In detail, if you wish to create a:
ate) Container object of type:
Subnetwork, type 501 or Subnetwork
Station, type 502 or Station
SubStation, type 503 or Substation
Radio Station, type 504 or Radio Station
Small Station, type 505 or Small Station

NE object of type
EL series radio, type 1 or Radio PDH
US series radio, type 2 or Radio SDH
PMP system, type 3 or PMP
CommServerS equipment, type 4 or CS
ADMC multiplexer, type 5 or ADM-C
ALS series radio with AL IDU/ALC IDU, type 7 or Radio PDH-AL
ELFO radio, type 8 or ELFO
ADM1 multiplexer, type 9 or ADM-1
ALS series radio with ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU, type 11 or ALS
ALFO radio, type 12 or ALFO
ALS series radio with AL IDU plus, type 14 or ALplus
SDH N+1 radio, type 15 or SDH N+1
ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus, type 16 or ALCplus
ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU, type 17 o ALplus2
ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU, type 18 o ALCplus2
FAMxc 5RU multiplexer, type 22 or FAMxc
FAMxc 2.5RU multiplexer, type 24 or FAMxc 2.5
IPBOX equipment, type 40 or IP-BOX
EXP63 multiplexer, type 41 or EXP63
ALplus node, type 64 or ALplus Node
ALCplus2 node, type 61 or ALCplus2 Node
Web Generic, type 94 or WEB Generic

Link object of type:


Generic line, type 1 or GENERIC
Dashed line, type 2 or DASHED
Dotted line, type 3 or DOTTED
Dotdash line, type 4 or DOTDASH

Label object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type -

IP-ADDRESS If you are creating a NE object, type the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.

(Parameter meaningful For the NE object type:


only for the NE object) ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node, type the IP address of the main equip-
ment of the node.
PMP, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection
to the master station.

If you are creating a Label, Container or Link object, compiling this field is not
meaningful. Type "-"

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 98


Parameter Possible values

NSAP If you are creating a NE object into an OSI network, white the NSAP address
(GOSIP) of the equipment.
(Parameter meaningful
only for NE objects insert- For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, write the NSAP address of
ed in an OSI network) the main equipment of the node.

The format of the NSAP address is the following:


If AFI is 49 (24 byte)
49 DDDD AAAA SSSSSSSSSSSS EE
If AFI is different from 49 (40 byte)
39 IIII VV UUUUUU RRRR DDDD AAAA SSSSSSSSSSSS EE
Legend:
39 or 49 = AFI (2 byte)
IIII = ID (4 byte)
VV = Ver (2 byte)
UUUUUU = Auth (6 byte)
RRRR = Reserved (4 byte)
DDDD = Domain (4 byte)
AAAA = Area (4 byte)
SSSSSSSSSSSS = System ID (12 byte)
EE = Sel (2 byte)

If you are creating a Label, Container, Link or NE object not inserted in an OSI
network, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type -

Name If you are creating an object:


NE, type an alphanumeric string of max 32 characters
(Object name)
Container, type an alphanumeric string of max 48 characters
Link, type an alphanumeric string of max 40 characters
Label, type an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters
Map Type the name of the map where you wish to create the object.
(Map name)

Path If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the complete path where
(Position of the map where you wish to create the object.
the object must be creat- Use the symbol / to point out the different level.
ed) Example. If you are creating a NE object and you type the path Europe/Italy/Rome,
this means that the equipment must be created in the container Rome, contained
in the container Italy contained, in its turn, in the container Europe.

If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type -

x If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position X (range 0-
(Position X of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the UX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetic grid
is taken as reference) If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type -

y If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position Y (range 0-
(Position Y of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the UX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetic grid
If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type -
is taken as reference)

Rules of the compilation of the csv file

Every Container, NE (SNMP), Label or Link object you wish the Add Network From File functionality auto-
matically creates must be inserted in the csv file.
Every object corresponds to a row.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 99


All the object parameters (Category, Type, etc.) must be compiled as pointed out in Tab.9. If a parameter
is not meaningful for the considered object, type the character - (hyphen) in the relevant field.
Besides the general indications described above, some of the rules described below must be respected.

Map parameter

All the objects inserted in a file must have the same value for the Map parameter.
This means that you must insert into a csv file only the objects you wish to create in a specific map.

This map is the map the user shall open (in Read-Write mode) (see step 3 of the procedure described
at pag.97).

If you wish to create the objects of a network which must be represented in more maps, the objects shall
be subdivided according to the belonging map and a csv file shall be created for each map.

Path parameter

The Path parameter represents the position, within the map, where the object must be created.
To point out the containing levels, use the symbol /.
Example. If you are creating a NE object, typing the path:
Europe/Italy/Rome, means that the equipment must be created within the container Rome, con-
tained in the container Italy, in its turn contained in the container Europe.
/, means that the equipment must be created within the main container (level Map - see Fig.2).

If the container name includes the character / the container name must be enclosed between inverted
commas (" ") in the description of the Path.
For example, in the description of a path the container Station A/B must be inserted in the following way
/Europe/Italy/StationA/B

If an object must be created in a container, this container must be already present in the map or must be
defined in the csv file (then created) before the object it must contain.
Example. Suppose to have to create the object NE1 in the container Italy and this container is not already
present in the map. In the csv file, the row defining the container Italy must be placed before the row de-
fining the NE object.

Link object definition

For the creation of a Link object, the parameters Category, Type, Name and Map must be pointed out.
The parameters IP Address and NSAP are not meaningful.
In this case, even the parameters Path, X, Y are not meaningful as the position of a Link object is deter-
mined by the position of the two objects Container and/or NE and/or Label which it must end.
This position is determined by the following rule:
A Link object is created as connection between the two Container/NE/Label objects described
in the two previous rows.
If an object of Link type is present in the two rows before (e.g., in row 8) the row of a Link (e.g., in row
10), the creation of the Link (e.g. in row 10) will not be carried out.

To compile the csv file starting from a model

A model file, which can be used as starting point for the creation of the file, is available in the server where
ones NMS5UX-B system.

The considered path/model file is the following:


opt/nms5ux/data/files/AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls.

The model is in xls format and the user must have an application program supporting this format (e.g., MS
Excel) to use it.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 100


For the creation of the csv file through the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls, carry out the fol-
lowing operations:

1. If ones machine is not provided with an application program supporting the xls format, copy the file
AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls to a PC provided with this application program.
2. Open the AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls file and rename it as you wish.

3. Define every single object you wish insert in the file typing the relevant characteristics in the specified
column of the table named TEMPLATE.
Each row represents an object.
Tab.9 reports, for every column, the list of values you can insert.
Before compiling the file, it is suggested to read the rules pointed out at pag.99.
The rows, whose first character is #, have been inserted only to help the user in the file compilation.
The information present in these rows WILL NOT be considered in the automatic creation of the objects,
then it is not necessary to remove them at the end of the compilation of the file.
The only information used for the automatic creation of the objects are those present in the
TEMPLATE table.

Save the file in csv format.

Example of use of Add Network From File functionality

Suppose to wish to graphically represent an hypothetic link ALplus1 - ALplus2 in the map nms5ux using
the Add Network From File functionality.
Before compiling the csv file, it is necessary to define if the link must be placed at the main level in the UX
Map Manager window or if it must be inserted into a container and which auxiliary objects (Link and Label)
you wish to create.
A possible representation of the link is depicted in Fig.15.

Fig.15 Representation of the link (example Add Network From File)

Example (Container)

Station A (Container)

ALplus 1
(NE)

ALplus 1 - ALplus 2 (Link)

Remote ALplus2 (Label)

Station A- Station B (Link)

Remote ALplus1 (Label)

ALplus 1 - ALplus 2 (Link)

ALplus 2
(NE)

Station B (Container)

Fig.15 points out, for every item to insert in the csv file, the object category (between brackets) and the
name.
At this point, the csv file can be created.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 101


Taking the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls (seepag.100) as reference and following the rules
pointed out at pag.99 and in Tab.9, the AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file, depicted in Fig.16, has
been created.
Fig.17 shows the same file opened by means of a text editor.

Fig.16 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (Add Network From File example)

Fig.17 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (test editor)

At this point, it is necessary to copy the file AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv to the server where the
NMS5UX-B system is installed (directory opt/nms5ux/data/files).
Then open the UX Map Manager window with the map nms5ux in Read-Write mode using a user with profile
Advanced, Privileged or Superuser (pag.72).
Select the Edit > Add > Network From File command and open the opt/nms5ux/data/files/
AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file.
The Add From File Report...AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv window, shown in Fig.18 opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 102


Fig.18 Add From File Report window (Add Network From File example)

The automatic creation of each objects implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on UX Map Manager
window as shown in Fig.19.

Fig.19 UX Map Manager window (Add Network From File example)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 103


OBJECT CREATION - AUTO DISCOVERY FUNCTIONALITY

The Auto Discovery functionality allows detecting the SNMP equipment present in the network and not
managed yet by the supervision system.
When a new equipment is detected, NMS5UX-B automatically carries out the following actions:
It inserts the detected equipment into the Auto Discovery table.
It creates the corresponding object in a given map/container (optional operation).
It connects the NE object (optional operation).
Moreover the functionality can detect and notify the user if the type of an object, already managed by
NMS5UX-B, is changed.

The Auto Discovery functionality puts two modalities to detect new equipment present in the network at
users disposal:
Network Scan modality (pag.104)
NE Wake Up modality (pag.106)

In order to work, the two modalities must be configured and activated by the user and can
be active at the same time or one at a time.

Network Scan modality

The Network Scan functionality is not available on OSI network.

The Network Scan modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network, not managed by
NMS5UX-B yet, and equipment whose type is changed (equipment described in the DB of the supervision
system, but of a type not corresponding to the real one).

The search is executed by a cyclic scanning of the network, executing a SNMP get on all the IP addresses
belonging to given intervals (configurable by the user).

When an equipment answers to the SNMP get, if the equipment:


Is NOT managed by NMS5UX-B yet, it is inserted into the list of the detected equipment and the
relevant NE object, if configured by the user, is created and connected.
Is already managed by NMS5UX-B but with a type different from that pointed out in the network
for the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by
NMS5UX-B. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus equip-
ment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the Network Scan modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6 is in-
cluded in the scanned IP address, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type
change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.

The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equip-
ment whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window (Fig.54).
For the new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the sys-
tem on the detection are pointed out.

In order to work, the Network Scan modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.

Then it will be possible to modify, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress. Moreover, it is possible to save a given setting of the parameters to a file an retrieve
it in a second moment (see pag.333).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 104


Setting of the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan mode

The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the Network Scan modality, are
the following:

IP addresses which must be scanned. One or more ranges of addresses and/or single IP address
can be defined.
Scheduling of execution of the cyclic scanning: once per day or continuous each X (hours:min-
utes) and number of IP addresses which must be scanned at the same time each X (seconds).
Example. Suppose that the cyclic scanning is set to be continuous each 3 hours and that, at each
scanning, 5 equipment must be scanned each 4 seconds. The IP addresses to scan in total count-
ing groups and single addresses are 15.
The scheduling of the cyclic scanning will take place as displayed in the following figure.

Interrogation Interrogation

4s 4s 4s 4s
5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 3h 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add.

Action to execute automatically on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible to choose


among one of the following actions:
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
Only insertion in the Auto Discovery table.
In this case, it will be possible then to create the equipment by means of a command
present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.336) or by the command Edit > Add (pag.150)
and to connect it.
Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.

When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Dis-
covery table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that cur-
rently open (map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.
If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.

If the container is not present in the set map, on the creation of the NE object, the container
will be automatically created too.

The NE object is not directly created into the container set by the user, but in the following
path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009

Fig.20 displays an example.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 105


Fig.20 Path containing the NE (example Auto Discovery)

The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan modality is reported at
pag.330.

Activation (deactivation) of the Network Scan modality

Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the Network Scan modality.
The modality is automatically activated if at least one IP address or a group of IP addresses has been set
and the configuration has been saved by means of the command Save as Active Conf (Fig.53).
The Network Scan modality remains active until when the user deactivates it removing all the values
present in the areas Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses (Fig.53) and saving the new setting by
means of the command Save as Active Conf.
The procedure to activate and deactivate the Network Scan modality is respectively reported at pag.330
and pag.332.

NE Wake Up modality

The NE Wake Up modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network not managed yet by
NMS5UX-B.
In this modality, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up notifications sent by the equipment and
containing the information necessary to the connection and the management of the equipment itself.
When a Wake Up trap is intercepted, the NMS5UX-B system carries out the following actions:
It disables the sending of Wake Up traps by the equipment (trap switch-off).
If the equipment which sent the trap:
Is NOT managed yet by NMS5UX-B, this inserts it in the list of detected equipment and,
if configured by the user, creates and connects the relevant NE object.
Is already managed by NMS5UX-B but with a type different from that pointed out in the
network for the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Dis-
covery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by
NMS5UX-B. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus
equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the NE Wake Up modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6
is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a
notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.

The Wake Up notification is a SNMP trap sent by the equipment to the supervision system to notify its
presence in the network.
The configuration of the Wake Up trap (activation or not of the trap, IP/NSAP address of the machine which

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 106


the trap must be sent to, modality of trap sending, etc.) MUST be executed by the local management pro-
gram LCT. For more information, see the relevant documentation.
The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment
whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window (Fig.54).
For the new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the sys-
tem on the detection are pointed out.

In order to work, the NE Wake Up modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.
Then it will be possible to modify, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress.
Moreover, it is possible to save a given setting of the parameters to a file an retrieve it in a second moment
(see pag.333).

Setting of the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up mode

The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the NE Wake Up modality, are
the following:
Action which must be automatically executed on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible
to choose among one of the following equipment:
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
Only insertion into the Auto Discovery table.
In this case, the equipment can be created in a second moment by means of the com-
mand present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.336) or by the command Edit > Add
(pag.150) and connect it.
Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.

When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Dis-
covery table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that cur-
rently open (map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.
If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
If the container is not present in the set map, on the creation of the NE object, the container
will be automatically created too.

The NE object is not directly created into the container set by the user, but in the following
path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009
Fig.20 displays an example.

The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up modality is reported at pag.332.

Activation (deactivation) of the NE Wake Up modality

Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the NE Wake Up modality.
The modality is activated (deactivated) activating (deactivating) the Manage Wake-up trap option and sav-
ing the configuration by means of the command Save as Active Conf (Fig.53).
The procedure to activate and deactivate the NE Wake Up modality is reported respectively at pag.332 and
pag.333.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 107


EQUIPMENT CONNECTION

After having graphically represented the network, it is necessary to activate the connection, then the com-
munication, between the NMS5UX-B system (logic NE objects created by the users) and the peripheral area
(physical equipment).

For the equipment managed with the:

LEGACY protocol the connection procedure (pag.111) is preceded by the opening of the serial
ports (pag.109) that are physically connected to the equipment themselves.
SNMP protocol execute immediately the connection procedure (pag.111) because it is assumed
that the correct operation of the physical connection between the equipment and the supervi-
sory system is ensured by the TCP/IP network.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 108


OPENING OF THE SERIAL PORTS

The opening of the serial ports is NECESSARY ONLY for the Legacy equipment.
For the SNMP equipment do not execute this operation, but pass immediately to the connection (pag.111).

For the Legacy equipment, before starting the connection procedure, it is necessary to activate the man-
agement processes of the serial ports to which the equipment themselves are physically connected.
This procedure is usually defined to open a serial port.

It is possible to connect the Legacy equipment to the supervision centre by means of the serial ports of
CommServer-S or the serial port (if properly configured) of IPBOX.
According to the hardware elements provided with the system, it will be necessary to open the serial ports
of the CommServer-S (represented by the CSB Port symbols present into the Equipment window of the
CommServer-S) and/or the serial port of the IPBOX (represented by the Comm Server B Port symbol
present into the Equipment window of the IPBOX).

It is not necessary to open all the serial ports present into the network but only the ones connected
with the equipment to be managed.

Opening modes of the serial ports

Before opening the serial ports, it is necessary to activate the connection of the relevant equipment
(Comm. Server-S/IPBOX) and the supervision system.

CommServer-S

1. Connect the equipment using the Command > Communication Server Board > Connect command
(pag.259).

2. Open the serial ports.


The procedure is described into the CommServer-S Manager manual.

IPBOX

1. Connect the equipment using the Command > Connect > Network Element command (pag.244).

2. Open the serial port.


The procedure is described into the IPBOX Manager manual.

The opening procedure of the serial port involves the management of the polling process relevant to the
equipment group connected to the port under examination. The HDLC polling process and the return of the
alarms/events will be activated at the connection of the equipment.
During the opening of each single port, the user will have to set the values of the T and N parameters that
define respectively the time and the transceiving number of a message before that the system would con-
sider an equipment as an unreachable one. The default values are T=10 and N=2. Then, it is possible to
define the time range between the polling of an equipment and the next one.
Usually the opening procedure of the serial port, if the connection of the relevant Comm. Server or IPBOX
object has been successfully ended, is correctly executed.
If the connection procedure of the Comm. Server or IPBOX has not been successfully executed, check the
following conditions:
The IP Address assigned to the NEs object is equal to the one assigned during the local config-
uration.
The equipment is turned on and correctly connected to the supervisory system.
ONLY if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, check that the NSAP (Gosip) Address
assigned to the NE object coincides with the NSAP (Gosip) Address assigned during its local con-
figuration.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 109


Closing modes of the serial ports

After having opened a serial port, it is possible to close it (it is deactivated the relevant managing process).

The operation is not accepted if there is also a single NE in connected status connected to the port to
be closed.

Closing the serial port, it will not possible longer to connect the equipment physically connected to the port
itself. Then, the polling process, relevant to the equipment group connected to the port under examination,
is not managed longer. Also the Comm. Server and IPBOX can be always disconnected if any of the serial
ports present into them is in open status.

A port can be automatically closed by the system after a supervisory loop or for an overflow of alarms
on the serial port itself.
The automatic closing procedure is executed independently from the connection status of the equipment
connected to such ports.
At the end of the procedure, the equipment connected to the port under examination will results unreach-
able, with the exception of the ones that were disconnected before the procedure; Such ones do not change
their status.

Supervisory loop. The supervisory network is overplaced to the transmission network enabling the prop-
er interfaces. The transmission network can be configured as a loop, on the contrary the supervisory net-
work does not allow this configuration type.
In a loop configuration, the propagation mode of a message causes the re-typing of the message itself,
after having run into the entire loop, into the same supervisory port from which it has entered. In such a
way, it will reach the most upstream equipment present into the propagation chain of the messages, until
to reach the serial port from which such a message has been forwarded.
Usually, when the supervisory system receives the same message that it has forwarded, it automatically
disables the serial port. In such a way, the message forwarded by the centre continues to run into the loop.
This situation is called supervisory loop.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 110


CONNECTION PROCEDURE

When the user sends the connection command, the NMS5UX-B system sends a test message to verify the
reach ability of the equipment (Line Test).

If the test has result:

NEGATIVE, the procedure is stopped: the equipment is not connected.


POSITIVE, the system sends the global network parameters and then reads/acquires from the
equipment the current configuration and the alarms: the equipment is connected.

At the first connection the system, having no information stored in the database, acquires all the informa-
tion from the NE.

Then, if the equipment is managed with the Legacy protocol, the system will forward the messages relevant
to the configuration only when it is changed a parameter. On the contrary, the alarm status is periodically
get by means of a polling cycle (pag.119).

If the equipment is managed with the SNMP protocol, the equipment itself will spontaneously inform the
supervisory system about possible changes concerning the configuration or the status of the alarms (SNMP
trap). A polling cycle from the supervisory system is kept only to check the reachability status of the equip-
ment.
The connection of an equipment causes the automatic insertion of the equipment itself into the specific
polling cycle.

Only after that an equipment has been connected at least once, it is possible to open the relevant equip-
ment window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 111


COMMANDS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF THE CONNECTION

In order to modify the connection status of an equipment or to execute some tests or to re-align the infor-
mation stored in the database, the following commands are available:

Line Test (pag.112)


Connect (pag.112)
Disconnect (pag.112)
Alarm Re-alignment (pag.113)
Configuration Upload (pag.113)
Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.113)

Line Test command

The Line Test command checks the real reach ability of the equipment.
The check consists in the request of the NMS5UX-B system to an NE of the value of the chosen parameter:
if the NE answers, the test has successful result, otherwise it fails.

All the NE, independently from their type or connection status, are programmed to answer to the test
message. Furthermore, the sending of the command does not influence the connection or alarm status of
the Network Element.
For the use of the command, refer to the par. Line Test (pag.242).

Connect command

The Connect command activates the connection between the NMS5UX-B system and the remote equip-
ment.
At the end of the procedure, if the result is positive, the system will be able to communicate with the NE,
it will have all the information relevant to the current status of the alarms and to the configuration and will
have sent the network time to the equipment.

It is not possible to connect an equipment in connected status. Furthermore, the connection command
towards an equipment in unreachable status is automatically sent by the system at regular intervals.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Connect (pag.244).

Disconnect command

The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and the remote equipment: the
system stops the management of the present NE.

The disconnection of an equipment does not involve the deletion of the relevant information from the
database; they stay stored, even if the equipment is disconnected; the user can open the relevant equip-
ment window where the last acquired configuration is displayed.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Disconnect (pag.246).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 112


Alarm Re-alignment command

The Alarm Re-alignment command re-aligns the current alarms of an equipment.


The re-aligning procedure involves that the system deletes the information present in the current alarms
table, relevant to the NE involved in the operation. Then the system requires to the NE the status of its
alarms and stores them in the current alarms table. The content of the current alarms table can be di-
splayed opening the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41).
This operation does not influence the connection status of the NE or its configuration.

It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by the NMS5UX-B system and the real alarm situation present on NE occurred. In fact
this command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the operating status of an equipment.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252).

Configuration Upload command

The Configuration Upload command re-aligns the information, relevant to the configuration and the
alarms, stored in the database to those really present in the equipment.
The execution mode of the procedure is fundamentally equal to the one used for the execution of the re-
aligning procedure on the alarms (pag.113); the only difference is that the system requires to the equip-
ment the status of the alarms and also the configuration information relevant to all the objects known by
the equipment itself. Also in this case, the information replace the ones recorded into the database.
This operation does not influence the status of connection of the NE.

It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by the NMS5UX-B system and the real configuration and operating status of the NE
occurred. In fact this command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the information rele-
vant to an equipment.

For the use of the command, refer to par. Configuration Upload (pag.254).

Legacy-Reset&Connect command

The command is forwarded only if it has been selected one or more Legacy equipment.
For the SNMP equipment the forwarding of the command under examination is not available because it
could be equal to the forwarding of the Connect command.

The Legacy-Reset&Connect command removes all the information stored into the database, relevant to
the equipment configuration and then activates the connection between the supervisory system and the
equipment itself.
At the end of the procedure, if it has been successfully executed, the system will be able to communicate
with the NEs as after a normal connection procedure; it will have get all the information relevant to the
configuration and to the functional status of the NEs then the NEs themselves will be automatically inserted
into the polling cycle.

This command has to be selected only in extreme cases, when the user supposes that it is present a
misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the supervisory system and the real sit-
uation present into the NEs. The duration of the reset and connection operation is usually longer than the
one of a normal connection because the entire configuration of the NE is transferred from the peripheral
part to the supervisory centre.

It is not possible to forward the Legacy-Reset&Connect command toward an equipment in connected


status.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.250).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 113


CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT

The connection status of an equipment shows to the user if the equipment is managed by NMS5UX-B and,
if managed, its operating status (alarms). The status of an equipment are:
Disconnected (pag.114)
Connected (pag.114)
Unreachable (pag.115)
Maintenance (pag.115)
In the UX Map Manager window, the current status of an equipment is represented by the colour of the
relevant NE symbol. In fact, one or more colours correspond to each status (pag.40).
The colour of the NE symbol influences also the colour of the Container symbols that contain the equipment
in the following way. If a container:
Contains at least one connected NE, the Container object will assume the colour relevant to the
connected status: green (if NE is not alarmed) or light blue/yellow/orange/red (if the NE is
alarmed).
Contains more connected NEs or other Container objects, the colour of the Container object will
be determined by the colour of the NE or Container symbol where the most serious alarm is
present.

The colour of the NE icon in maintenance status does not affect he colour if the Container icons where
it is present the NE. For instance, if into a Container object there is an equipment in connected status (gre-
en colour) and an equipment in maintenance status (pink colour), the Container icon will get the colour
relevant to the connected status (green).

Disconnected status

Initial status of an NE just after its creation; then it is the status reached after a disconnection command.
In this condition, the equipment is not managed by the system: no message is sent or received and no
polling procedure is executed.

OPERATIONS that the user can execute when an equipment is disconnected


Send the Line Test (pag.242), Connect (pag.244) and Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.250)
(only for the Legacy equipment) command.
Delete the NE object (pag.156).
It is possible to open the equipment window only if the NE has been connected at least once.
The disconnection does not involve the deletion of the database of the information on the equip-
ment configuration. In this case, however, the status and the values of the attributes of the ob-
jects contained in the window are not referred to the current condition of the equipment but to
the last known configuration.

Conditions/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After the sending of the Connect or Legacy-Reset&Connect command:
If the operation is successfully, the equipment passes to connected status.
If the operation fails, the equipment passes in an unreachable status.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the icon associated to the disconnected status is BROWN.

Connected status

Status reached after a connection procedure gone well. In this condition, the equipment correctly answers
to the system polling.
During the period when the equipment is connected, the user can send commands and require information.
Only exception to this rule is the presence of LCT in Configuration modality (pag.116).

OPERATIONS that the user can execute when an equipment is connected

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 114


Open the equipment window and verify/modify the NE configuration.
The configuration/operating status of the NE corresponds to the real situation of the equipment.
Send the commands for the management of the equipment.

Condition/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After:
The user sends the disconnection command, the equipment switches to disconnected status.
A system polling, if the equipment does not send any answer, the status from connected be-
comes unreachable.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the symbol of a connected NE depends on the alarms present in the equipment itself. De-
pending on the severity of the current alarms, the colour can be:
Green. The equipment is not alarmed.
Light blue. At least one alarm of Warning level is present on the equipment (simple signalling).
Yellow. At least one alarm of Minor level is present on the equipment (alarm).
Orange. At least one alarm of Major level is present on the equipment (serious alarm).
Red. At least one alarm of Critical level is present on the equipment (very serious alarm).

If there are more alarms of different severity on the equipment at the same time, the colour of the NE
symbol will represent the most serious alarm.

Unreachable status

This is the status reached when the equipment, thought the automatic repetition of the messages, does
not answer to the polling of NMS5UX-B or sends unknown messages. In this condition, the NE is not man-
aged by the system, which however sends a connection command at regular interval.

OPERATIONS executable by the user when an equipment is unreachable


Sending the Disconnect (pag.246), Line Test (pag.242), Connect (pag.244) and Legacy-Re-
set&Connect (pag.250) (only for the Legacy equipment) command.
The equipment window can be opened only if the equipment has been connected at least once.
The status and the values of the attributes of the objects contained in the window will not be
referred to the current condition of the equipment but to the last known configuration.

Conditions/commands that cause the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO ANOTHER ONE
After the user or the NMS5UX-B system has sent the connection command (automatic re-connection):
If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to connected status.
If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.
After an user has sent the disconnection command:
If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to disconnected status.
If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the NE icon associated to the unreachable status is RED with an X on the symbol.

Maintenance status

The maintenance status indicates a transient condition.


The equipment assumes this status during the execution of an operation, for example during the connec-
tion. At the end of the operation, the NE will assume the status associated to its condition (connected, dis-
connected, unreachable).

OPERATIONS executable by the user when an equipment in unreachable


When the NE is in maintenance status, no operation can be executed.

COLOUR of the NE symbol


The colour of the NE icon associated to the maintenance status is RED.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 115


LOM/LCT

LOM/LCT term means the software application, developed to manage/control locally the equipment: Local
Operator Manager, Local Craft Terminal, WEB Local Craft Terminal.
The operations that can be executed via LOM/LCT are basically those that can be executed via NMS5UX-B.

More information on the use of the LOM/LCT program is reported in the specific documentation. Here
below only some indications are reported about the relationships between LOM/LCT and NMS5UX-B:

Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration (pag.116)


Indication of the presence of the LOM/LCT user to the NMS5UX user (pag.117)
Enabling/disabling of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality (pag.117)

Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration

The local user can activate the LOM/LCT-equipment connection in Monitoring modality (the user can only
verify the equipment configuration) or in Configuration modality (the user can both verify and modify the
equipment configuration).

The local activation of a LOM/LCT-equipment connection in modality:

Monitoring, does not influence the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of commands by the
system: the NMS5UX user can open the equipment window and verify/modify the equipment
configuration itself.
Configuration, if the NE is:
Managed with Legacy protocol, it is not possible to change the configuration parameters
or to forward commands: the NMS5UX user can not open the equipment window.
Managed with SNMP protocol, influences the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of
the commands by the system.
The NMS5UX user can open the equipment window (except for the equipment of PMP
type) but it cannot modify the configuration and send commands with the following ex-
ceptions:
Execute the software reset of an equipment (pag.261)
Transfer the configuration of an equipment to another one of the same type
(pag.256)
Updating the equipment software (pag.400)
Forcing the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user (pag.381)
During the period when the connection is active, no modification relevant to the alarms is sig-
nalled to the NMS5UX-B system.
When the local LCT-equipment connection is deactivated, the NMS5UX-B system automatically
re-aligns the configuration (sending of the Configuration Upload command - pag.113) to con-
trol possible changes executed by the local user and to acquire the current alarms.
If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are
acquired and replaced to those previously present stored in the database.

For SCT/WEB LCT program, the:


Monitoring modality corresponds to the activation of the SCT-equipment connection with Read
Only user profile.
Configuration modality corresponds to the activation of the SCT-equipment connection with
Read And Write, Station Operator or System user profile.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 116


Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user

The activation and the deactivation of the local connection, both in Monitoring and Configuration modality,
are spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS5UX-B system and signalled to the user:

In the map, a check sign is indicated next to the NE icon ( ) is indicated next to the NE icon.
This information is forwarded also to the Container objects containing the NE.
Furthermore, the activation of the local connection in Configuration modality is signalled to the
user in the map: the NE icon assumes the white colour.
This information is not forwarded by the Container objects that contain the NE symbol. For
example, if a Container object contains a connected NE (green colour) and an equipment which
the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected (white colour), the Container symbol
will assume the colour relevant to the connection status (green).
In the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39), Current Alarms Browser (Fig.41), Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] (Fig.36), Information (Fig.23).
In the equipment window of the NE.

To enable/disable of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modal-


ity

The description reported here below can be applied only for the SNMP equipment.
The NMS5UX user can enable/disable the LCT user to connect to the equipment in Configuration modality
setting the LCT Config.

If the parameter has value:


Enabled, points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment both in
Monitoring and Configuration modality.
Disabled, points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment only in
Monitoring modality.

Independently from the previous setting, when the equipment is switched off and switched on or reset, the
LCT Config parameter is automatically set to the Enabled value.

The command to set the LCT Config parameter is present in the equipment window. Besides the status of
the LCT Config parameter is displayed in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] equipment (Fig.36).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 117


ALARM MANAGEMENT

Functionality of primary importance of the NMS5UX-B system is the detection, visual signalling and cen-
tralized storing of the alarm/status/event signallings present in the equipment that manages.

The alarm term defines the fault signalling generated by an error or by a bad operation of the NE or of
any element that composes it.

The status and event terms identify the signallings that do not indicate a bad operation but a status
change, a running operation or an operation condition. In detail, the signallings of:
Status, are communicated spontaneously from the NE to the system, as for example:
The activation/deactivation of the LCT-equipment connection.
The start/end of the updating of the software of the equipment.
The activation/deactivation of the manual operations.
The status of active/stand-by of duplicated parts of NE.
Event, are generated by the system itself, as for example the start of an operation of alarm re-
alignment.

In the following of the chapter, the alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signalling.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 118


ACQUISITION OF THE ALARMS

The acquiring process of the alarms changes according to the type of protocol used by the equipment. With
details for the equipment:
Managed with the Legacy protocol, the acquiring of the alarms is executed by means of a polling
process by the supervisory centre (pag.119), through the serial interfaces of the Comm Server
and/or IPBOX, toward all the equipment in connected status.
Managed with SNMP protocol, the detection and reset signals of an alarm are spontaneously for-
warded to the supervisory centre by the equipment (trap SNMP). A polling process executed by
the supervisory centre is kept only to check the reachability status of the equipment.

The equipment in disconnected or unreachable status are not cyclically subjected to polling. It is possible
to force the acquisition of the alarms of an equipment using the Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252) or Con-
figuration Upload command (pag.254).

Polling

The contents of the subject paragraph refer to the Legacy equipment. For the SNMP equipment
the polling process executes only the checking of the reachability of the equipment themselves, and does
not collect the alarms.

Polling execution

Each CS/IPBOX port autonomously executes the polling process relevant to the local equipment (directly
connected) and to the remote ones (connected in cascade by means of EOC, service channels, etc.). In
such a way, the acquiring times of the alarms are strongly reduced because for a high dimension network
it is not executed a single polling process but as much processes as are the managed and in open status
CS/IPBOX ports.
The polling process is managed by a properly devoted program, loaded into the CommServer for the CS
ports and into the IPBOX for the IPBOX port. Such a programs makes cyclically available the connection
line for each single equipment connected to the same CS/IPBOX port. The equipment involved into the poll-
ing cycle communicates to the supervisory system all the detected changes, if the alarm status has
changed from the last polling time. After having forwarded all the information, the connection line will be-
come available for the next equipment.
The duration of the polling cycle changes according to the number of equipment connected to the CS/IP-
BOX port and to the quantity of the transmitted alarms.
Though every alarm is timestamped (by the remote equipment at the occurrence of such an alarm), the
duration of the polling cycle or the query sequence of the equipment into such a cycle will not affect the
correct displaying of the alarm information for the user.

Polling and command forwarding

The polling procedure, executed between CS/IPBOX and equipment, is completely transparent for the user:
it is automatically executed without affecting the operations executed by the NMS5UX user.
But since the connection line between the serial port and the relevant equipment group is a single one, the
forwarding of a command executed by the centre is a priority one with respect to the cyclic polling process.
In fact, when it is forwarded a command (for instance, the change of a parameter), to an equipment A, if
the polling process of an equipment B is on progress, the system waits for the end of the polling operation
on the equipment A. After that it executes the command and then restart again the polling procedure from
the step it has been suspended on the equipment B.

Polling and LOM/LCT activation

The activation of the local connection between the equipment and the LOM/LCT program does not affect
the automatic acquiring of the alarms for the equipment under examination.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 119


DYNAMIC DISPLAYING OF THE ALARMS

At each change of the status of the alarms on the equipment present in the network, the NMS5UX-B system
informs the user by means of the UX Map Manager window, executing the following operations:
If present in the open map, the NE symbol where the alarm has been detected changes colour
according to the severity associated to the alarm.
If a alarm more serious than the detected one is present on the equipment, the icon does not
change colour, because it is determined by the alarm more serious present on the equipment.
The NE icon reports also the information that a not yet checked alarm is present.
The status of the NE (change of colour and presence of a not yet checked alarm) is signalled
also by the Container symbols that have, inside them, this NE (the colour of the Container icons
changes).
The colour of the Container symbol is determined by the colour of the NE symbol contained in-
side it, where the most serious alarm is present.
If open, in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) the record relevant to the detected alarm
is added.
If open, in the Current Alarm Browser window (Fig.41) the record relevant to the detected alarm
is added.
If open, in the equipment window relevant to the NE, where the alarm has been detected, the
NE symbol is graphically modified.
If the equipment window has Read Only access the alarm is not signalled, as the window is not
dynamically updated. To update the alarms, it is necessary to require a new reading of the table
relevant to the current alarms.

In the Alarm History Browser and Current Alarm Browser window if:
Some filters are active, it is possible that the record is not added as it does not satisfy the set
filtering criteria.
The freezing of the window is activated, the record is not added.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 120


DISPLAYING OF THE CURRENT ALARMS AND OF THE ALARM HISTORY

The user can anytime display:


The history of the alarms relevant to all the equipment (Network Alarm History command -
pag.264) or only to the selected equipment (NE Alarm History command - pag.285).
The alarm history term means the list of alarms, acquired and recorded by the supervision sys-
tem in the time. The alarm history records both the detection signalling and the clearing signal-
ling of the alarm.
In the alarm history, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records (value that can
be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their
number exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked;
if this exceeds the maximum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and
cleared signallings, the oldest records.
If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the
maximum set value, the system will NOT delete any record.
When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History oc-
cupation exceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The dis-
play of the message and the frequency at which it is displayed can be configured by Superuser.
Default: display of the message active; frequency: every 60 seconds.
The list of the alarms currently active on all the equipment (Network Current Alarms com-
mand - pag.273) or only in the selected equipment (NE Current Alarms command - pag.286).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 121


ALARM CORRELATION

The alarm correlation term means the functionality that puts in relationship, in the alarm history, the ac-
tivation of an alarm with that of its clearing.

In detail, in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) the notification of the activation of the alarm is
displayed by a record where the date/time of activation of the alarm activation is displayed. The clearing
of the same alarm is indicated adding, to the already existing record, the indication of the deactivation
date/time.
After a forced alignment of the alarm status, not all the notifications of the alarms active on the equipment
are recorded, but only the possible new alarms.

Furthermore, after the forced realignment, for the alarms that are not active anymore, the deactivation
date/time will be inserted in the relevant record.

If an equipment is disconnected, all the (detected and detected/cleared) alarms relevant to that equip-
ment are removed by the alarm history.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 122


SAVING OF THE ALARMS

It is possible to save the alarm history stored in the NMS5UX-B database. In detail, it is possible:
To save all the alarm history to tape and/or to disk present in the database (pag.423).
Then, it will be possible to recover the data (pag.424) and display them in the Old History Brows-
er window (Fig.42).
To save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) present in the database of the system
(pag.267).
To save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) recovered from tape or disk (pag.281).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 123


ALARM SEVERITY

Each alarm, acknowledged and managed by the NMS5UX-B system, has associated a severity which de-
termines the alarm importance.

Each severity is identified by a name and a colour, as indicated in Tab.10.

Tab.10 Alarm severity

Severity Name Color

Very serious alarm Critical Red


Serious alarm Major Orange
Alarm Minor Yellow
Minor alarm Warning Light blue

The alarm severity is the criterion used by NMS5UX-B to represent graphically the operational status of the
equipment.
When an alarm raises in a connected alarm, the icon that represents the equipment modifies its colour
according to the severity of the active alarm present inside it.
The colour of the Container symbols containing the NE reflects the condition of current alarm.
If more alarms of different severity are present at the same time, the colour of the icon will represent the
most serious alarm; the same occurs for the container icons.
The severity of an alarm is reported also in the Alarm History Browser (Fig.39) and Current Alarm Browser
(Fig.41).

Modification of the alarm severity

The contents of the subject paragraph can be applied only for the SNMP equipment.

The NMS5UX-B system allows modifying, for each alarm, the severity of network and the local severity.

Network severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when displayed by the NMS5UX-B sys-
tem. For each alarm, the network severity is COMMON to all the NEs of the same type present in all the
maps. To modify the network severity of an alarm, use the SNMP-Network Severity Code command
(pag.368 - command available only to the Superuser).

Local severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when stored by the controller of the NE and
displayed by the local management system (LCT); this severity is not used by NMS5UX-B. For the same
alarm, it is possible to define a local severity different from NE to NE. To modify the local severity of an
alarm, use the SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command (pag.370).

Example
Suppose that two types of SDH Radio are connected to the NMS5UX-B system: NE-A and NE-B.
By means of the SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command, it is defined that, locally, the alarm x for
NE-A has severity Major, while for the NE-B has severity Minor.
Instead, using the SNMP-Network Severity Code command, it is defined that the alarm x for all the NEs
of SDH Radio type of Critical severity.
In the NE-A, the detection (or cleared) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and seen by
LCT with Major severity, while it will be seen by NMS5UX-B with Critical severity.
Instead, in the NE-B, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE
and seen by LCT with Minor severity, while it will be seen by NMS5UX-B with Critical severity.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 124


Modification of the severity of the alarms of User Input

What described below is valid for all the alarms (of all the types of SNMP equipment) with the exception of
the alarms used by the user input.

The severity of the alarms of User Input is defined by means of a specific command present in the equip-
ment window.

This severity constitutes both the network and the local severity.

For example, if the User Input x alarm for an equipment is defined having a Critical severity, on its detec-
tion the alarm will be stored in the controller of the NE, seen by LCT and by NMS5UX-B with Critical sever-
ity.

The setting of the severity is independent for each alarm of User Input, and local to the NE selected for the
operation. This means that the setting must be executed for each single alarm of user Input of each single
NE.

More information on the user inputs and on the command to modify the severity is reported in the equip-
ment manual of the NMS5UX-B.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 125


ENABLING/DISABLING OF THE ALARMS

The contents of the subject paragraph are valid only for the SNMP equipment.

The NMS5UX-B system allows enabling/disabling the alarms and/or the sending of the relevant traps. In
detail, it is possible:
To disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is not recorded in the
controller of the NE and it is not communicated to the supervision program: as the alarm has
never occurred.
To disable the sending of traps; in this case, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is recorded
in the controller of the NE, but it is not communicated to the supervision system.

If the Configuration Upload (pag.254) or Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252) command is


sent to NE, also the alarms, whose trap sending is disabled, will be acquired.
To enabled the alarm and the sending of trap; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm
is recorded in the controller of the NE and communicated to the supervision system (with the
sending of the relevant trap) that display it in the current alarms and in the alarm history (de-
fault condition).

The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the trap sending is independent for each alarm, and local to
the selected NE for the operation. This means that the setting must be made for each single alarm of each
single NE.

To enable/disable the alarms and the sending of traps of an equipment, use the SNMP-Equipment Se-
verity Code command (pag.370).

It is possible to verify the list of the NEs that have at least one disabled alarm/trap opening the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window (Fig.36) and configuring properly the filter.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 126


FLEETING ALARMS

Sometime there can be that, in an equipment, an alarm is detected and is cleared many times in a brief
period.
The instability that characterizes these alarms, defined fleeting, causes a such number of alarms to satu-
rate the network. In fact, each time the alarm raises/clears, the system records a signalling.
For this cause, before recording an alarm, the stability of the alarm itself is verified.
The criterion used to determine if an alarm is fleeting or not is the following: an alarm is considered fleeting
when NMS5UX-B, during a period of time t, records that the number of activation of the alarm is higher
than the thr_in threshold.
An alarm will not be considered fleeting anymore if, during the successive period of time t, the number of
activation of the alarm is lower than the thr_out threshold.

Example

Suppose that the values t=120, thr_in=3, thr_out=1 are set.


The alarm A, within 120 seconds, activates and clears twice and, on its third activation, (thr_in=3) the
supervision system marks it as fleeting alarm: the successive activation/clearing are not recorded in the
Alarm History table.
At the successive period of 120 seconds, if the alarm A activates and clears only once (thr_out=1), the
supervision system does not consider the alarm A as fleeting anymore.
The parameter t and the thr_in and thr_out thresholds can be modified by the Superuser. Their default
values are: t = 120 sec., thr_in = 3, thr_out =1.

In the Alarm History Browser window, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signalling
came to the equipment pointed out the deactivation of the alarm, the management of the signalling alarm
will take place without differences with respect to a normal signalling of cleared alarm: the alarm is corre-
lated to the previous signalling.
Differently, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signalling came to the equipment
pointed out the activation of the alarm, the management will take place in the following way: first a sig-
nalling of cleared alarm will be forwarded, which will be correlated with the previous signalling of fleeting
alarm, and then a new signalling of active alarm of active alarm will be forwarded: in the Alarm History
Browser window, a record of fleeting alarm will be displayed, followed by a record of active alarm.

The fleeting condition of an alarm is not deleted at the forced realignment of the status of the alarms
(Alarm Re-alignment command - pag.252).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 127


MARKING OF THE ALARMS (ACKNOWLEDGE)

The current alarms and those present in the alarm history can be marked: in the relevant window there is
the indication that the user acknowledged the detection or/and the clearing of the alarm.

For the alarms stored in the alarm history and listed in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) or in
the Old History Browser (Fig.42), it is possible to mark both the detection and the clearing of the alarm
(pag.267).

An alarm:
Detected and marked is identified by the letter S in the Ack column of the Alarm History Browser
or Old History Browser window.
Detected/cleared and marked is identified by the letter C in the Ack column of the Alarm History
Browser or Old History Browser window.

When the list of alarms is filtered or in the windows where the total number of marked alarms, the rules
to define if an alarm is considered marked or not are the following.

A marked alarm is:


An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has marked the detection (presence
of the letter S).
An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has marked the clearing (presence of the let-
ter C).

A not marked alarm is:


An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has not marked the detection (ab-
sence of the letter S).
An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has not marked the clearing (absence of the
letter C).

In this case, even if the user has marked the detection of the alarm (presence of the letter
S), it is considered as not marked because the user has not marked its clearing.

For the current alarms, listed in the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41), there is not the above men-
tioned distinction, because it is possible to mark only the detected alarms (pag.275).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 128


MANAGEMENT OF NE LOG

With NE Log (Network Element Log) we mean a file where are recorded the signals of alarm/status (alarms)
stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment.
The Log read by an equipment (NE Log) is stored into the machine disk, available for the next reading by
the user.

The creation of a NE Log can be manually done by the user and/or automatically by the system.

The manual creation of the NE Log of one or more equipment can be done by the user by means of the
command Fault > SNMP-NE History Log (pag.287).
By means of the commands, it is even possible to manage the NE Logs (delete, display the content) and
delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment.

The automatic creation of the NE Logs, if the relevant function is active, consists in the automatic creation
of the NE Log for the SNMP equipment which pass from the unreachable status to the connected status.
The function for the automatic creation of the NE Logs can be activated/deactivated by the system admin-
istrator during the installation of the NMS5UX system itself.

The NE Logs can be displayed only through the Equipment History Log Management Main Window (Fig.43).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 129


PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT

The quality of the signal of the telecommunication equipment can be controlled via measures of Perform-
ance Monitoring (PM).

A measure of PM consists in recording, during a set time period (observation period), the values of deter-
minated control parameters (BER, alarm counting, etc).

Threshold limits (that can be modified by the Superuser) have been assigned to these parameters.

The exceeding of threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition
generates an alarm, which is recorded and managed by the equipment and by the NMS5UX-B system as
any other alarm.

The number and the type of measures of PM and the relevant control parameters are specific for each
type of NE. For their description, refer to the relevant equipment Manuals.

The considered control parameters changes according to the type of equipment and of measures that this
equipment supports. Generally, all the executed measures refer to Recommendations of ITU-T (for exam-
ple G.826, G.821, etc.).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 130


ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF THE PM MEASURES

It is possible to activate/deactivate the measures for a single equipment at a time or for more equipment
(of the same type) at the same time.

Furthermore, for each equipment, it is possible to activate/deactivate each single measure independently.

The command to activate/deactivate singly the PM measures is present in the specific equipment window.
The description of the equipment window and the procedure for the activation/deactivation of the PM me-
asures are contained in the equipment Manual relevant to the type of considered NE.

The command to activate/deactivate the measures for more equipment (of the same type) at the same
time is View/Modify PM Status (pag.181).

When a PM measure is activated, the controller of the equipment begins the storing of the values of the
control parameters.

The results of the measures are subdivided in records. Each record contains the values recorded in a spe-
cific time interval (observation period).

If, at the end of the observation period, the measure has not been deactivated, another observation period
begins and so on until the measure is not stopped.

When the system interrogates the equipment, this will send to it the records (daily and primary) that
stored.

The equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B, group the results of the PM measures in observation period of
15 minutes (primary records) and 24 hours (daily record).

The observation periods are not synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated, but refer,
for the primary records, to the quarter (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily records, to the time
00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).

For example, if a measure starts at time 11.40, the first primary record will have, as observation period,
11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the interval 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have, as ob-
servation period, 11.40...00.00.

For each type of measure, the equipment keeps in memory the last 16 primary records (corresponding to
the last 4 hours) and the last 2 daily records (corresponding to the last 2 days). The previous records are
overwritten.

If an equipment has PM measures running and it is restarted or switched off, then, when it restarts to it is
switched on, the measures active before the switching off will be automatically restarted.

The (daily and primary) records relevant to the period when the measure has been interrupted will be emp-
ty and, if reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily record, will overwrite the previous ones.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 131


ACQUISITION OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES

The results of the PM measures are acquired by the NMS5UX-B system by means of a polling process (PM
polling) that is executed at regular interval that can vary from 1 to 4 h. The frequency for the request of
the PM information by the system to the equipment is determined by the function Tx15 minutes. The value
T, by default, is 8 (8x15min=2h), but it can be changed by the Superuser from 4 (4x15min=1h) to 16
(16x15min=5h).

The process of PM polling is managed by a dedicated program which, besides executing the polling, has
the function to determinate which equipment must be polled.

The rules that an equipment must satisfy to be polled are the following:

Equipment type. Not all the equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B system supports the PM func-
tion. This equipment are not considered in the PM polling cycle.
Equipment status. Only the equipment in connected status are polled. The equipment in disconnect-
ed or unreachable status are not polled.

Status of the PM measures. Only the equipment that have at least one measure active in progress
when the PM polling is executed.

After a PM polling, the polled equipment sends the daily and primary records relevant to the measures in
progress.

If the measure is deactivated, when the NMS5UX-B system executes the polling, the equipment sends all
the (primary and daily) records calculated until that moment, except the last one.
For example, if the measure is activated at 9.27 and deactivated at 18.42, the record relevant to the ob-
servation period 9.15...9.30 is transferred to the system in incomplete status, while the record relevant to
the period 18.30...18.45 is not sent.
If the measure is activated and deactivated more times during the same observation period, the record
containing the results of the last executed measure will be sent to the NMS5UX-B system.

For example, if the measure is activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it is re-activated at 9.09,
the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the measures relevant
to the period 9.09...9.15, while the results relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be sent.

PM Polling and sending of the commands

The PM polling is totally transparent to the user: it is automatically executed without affecting the opera-
tions executed by the NMS5UX user.

Being the only connection line between the system and the equipment, the sending of a command by the
centre is prioritary with respect to the process of cyclic polling.

For example, when a command is sent to an equipment A during the polling of an equipment B, the system
waits for the end of the polling in progress. After this, it executes the command towards the equipment A
and, then, it restarts the polling procedure from the point it has been suspended on the equipment B.

PM Polling and activation of the LCT-equipment connection

The activation of the local LCT-equipment connection does not affect the automatic acquisition of the re-
sults of the PM measures for the considered equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 132


DISPLAYING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES

The NMS5UX user can anytime display the results of the PM measures of a given equipment, subdivided
in daily or primary records of the last 180 days.

To display the daily and primary records, select the equipment in the map and choose the Performance
Monitoring command (pag.173).

It is also possible to display the results of the PM measures, previously saved to disk by means of the Old
Performance Monitoring command (pag.177).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 133


SAVING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES TO DISK

It is possible to save the results of the PM measures stored in the database of the system. In detail, it is
possible:
To save to tape and/or disk all the results of the PM measures relevant to a month present in
the database (pag.426).
Then, it will be possible to recover the data (pag.427) and display them in the Graphic Perform-
ance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.177).
To save on file the results (present into the system database) relevant to a specific measure-
ment for all the selected NEs of the same type (pag.179).
During the saving operations, it is possible to forward the file to a user, via e-mail.
The data are saved in ASCII format, that can be detected by the great part of the text processing
programs and of the electronic sheets.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 134


MENU AND COMMANDS

The commands preceded by the wording:

NMS5UX, point out the commands relevant to the management of the NMS5UX-B system.
Legacy..., point out the commands relevant to the equipment managed with the Legacy proto-
col ONLY.
Such commands are present into the menus only if the modules for the management of the Leg-
acy equipment have been installed.
SNMP..., point out the commands relevant to the equipment managed with the SNMP protocol
only.

The commands with the label that does not point out the Legacy or SNMP wording, are relevant to all the
equipment.

Some commands are optional ones. Therefore, such commands can be absent into the specific menu of its
own NMS5UX-B system.
For each command, the type of access to the system (Read Only, Read-Write) and the user profile (Entry,
Normal,...) necessary to use it are described. The Reading terms indicates that it is possible to verify the
parameters, the Writing term that it is possible to set or modify them.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 135


MAP

The Map menu contains the following commands:

Refresh (pag.137). It updates the UX Map Manager window.


Map Properties (pag.138). It changes the dimension of the symbols of the map.
Submap Properties (pag.139). It associates/remove the background from a container.
Import/Export (pag.140). It compares/imports/exports the objects from a map to another. It
saves the objects of a map into a file.
Change Map (pag.145). It changes or deletes the map.
Exit (pag.147). It closes the UX Map Manager window (NMS5UX-B graphic interface).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 136


REFRESH

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Refresh command update the UX Map Manager window.

To update the UX Map Manager window

1. Select the Map > Refresh command.


The UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) is closed and then re-opened.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 137


MAP PROPERTIES

System access Read-Write


User profile Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Map Properties command modifies the size of the symbols present in the View area (pag.34) of the
UX Map Manager window (equipment, containers, etc.).

To modify the size of the symbols

1. Select the Map > Map Properties command.


The Map Properties window opens.

2. Select the option relevant to the wished size (in pixel).

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
In the View area, the symbols of equipment, containers, etc. assume the new size.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 138


SUBMAP PROPERTIES

System access Read-Write


User profile Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Submap Properties command associates a background to the container in such a way that, on its
selection in the View area (pag.34), the background is displayed besides the symbols present in the con-
tainer.

It is possible to associate a different background to each container in the same map.

To associate/remove the background to a container

1. Select, in the Map area (pag.32), the container which you wish to associated the background to.

2. Select the Map > Submap Properties command.


The Submap Properties window opens.

3. To add the background, type in the Background Pixmap box, the path/name of the file and press OK.
The system acknowledges, as background, the files in GIF format.
Press Browse to search the wished file in the disk.
The background is displayed in the View area.

4. To remove the background, delete the file specified in the Background Pixmap box and press OK.
The background is removed in the View area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 139


IMPORT/EXPORT

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Import/Export command imports/exports/compares the objects from a map to another and saves
the objects of a map into a file.
With details it is possible:
To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container (pag.140)
To copy the objects, previously saved to a file, into a map/container (pag.142)
To save the objects of a map/container to a file (pag.142)
To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container
(pag.143)
To compare the objects, previously saved to a file, with the objects of a map/container
(pag.144)

To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command.


The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21).
2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option.

4. Set the source map/container:


a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.
The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.
c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.
d. Press OK.
The source map/container is pointed out in the Source box.

5. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.


The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.

The destination map must be different from the source map.


c. If you wish that the objects of the source map or container are pasted into a container of the
destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box.

6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:


Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects present in the source map/container replace the
objects present in the destination map/container.
Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects present in the source map/
container to the destination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.
7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
deleted and/or created object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 140


Fig.21 Import Export Map window

Menu
bar (1)

Parameters
to set to
import/export
the objects
(2)

The result of
the operation
is displayed,
according to
the executed
operation, in
this area (3)

Fig.21 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Close. It closes the window.

(2) Option:
Copy data. It copies the objects from a file or map/container to a different file or map/con-
tainer.
Compare data. It compares the objects of a file or map/container to a different map/contain-
er.
From Map/Submap to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects present in a map/con-
tainer into a different map/container.
From File to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects present into a file to a map/con-
tainer.
From Map/Submap to File. Copies the objects present in a map/container to a file.
Clear and Copy All. It replaces the objects present into a file or map/container with those
present into a different file or map/container.
Copy Only Differences. It compares the objects present in two different files or maps/con-
tainers and copies into the destination map/container only the different objects.
Box:
Source. File or map/container from which the objects are copied (source).
Destination. File or map/container to which the objects are pasted (destination).

(3) Each record identifies an object involved in the operation.


Depending on the type of executed operation, one or more fields will be present pointing out the
type of executed operation, the object involved in the operation and the result of the operation it-
self.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 141


To copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command.


The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21).

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From File to Map/Submap option.


4. Set the file from which you wish to copy the objects:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.


The File Selection window opens.
b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.
The system proposes the files present in the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.
5. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.


The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.
c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are pasted into a container of the destination map,
select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box.

6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:


Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects present in the file replace the objects present in
the destination map/container.
Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects present in the file to the des-
tination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.

7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
deleted and/or created object.

To save the objects of a map/container to a file

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command.


The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21).
2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to File option.

4. Set the source map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.


The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.
c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.
d. Press OK.
The source map/container is pointed out in the Source box.

5. Set the file into which you wish to save the objects:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.


The File Selection window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 142


b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.
The system proposes the files present in the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
c. Press OK.
The Destination box displays the path/name of the destination file.

6. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
saved object.

To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different


map/container

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command.


The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21).

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option.


A box opens.

3. Select the wished value in the box:


View all data. Compares all the objects present in the source map/container with those present
in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects present in the
maps/containers.
View aligned data. Compares the objects present in the map/container with those present in the
destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects present in both the
maps/containers.
View not aligned data. Compares the objects present in the source map/container with those
present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.

4. Select the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.

5. Set the source map/container:


a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.
The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.
c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.
d. Press OK.
The source map/container is pointed out in the Source box.

6. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.


The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.

The destination map must be different from the source map.


c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects present into a con-
tainer of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box.

7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
compared object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 143


To compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/
container

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command.


The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21).

2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option.


A box opens.
3. Select the wished value in the box:
View all data. Compares all the objects present in the file with those present in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects present in the file and in the maps/
containers.
View aligned data. Compares the objects present in the file with those present in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects present in the file and in the map/
container.
View not aligned data. Compares the objects present in the file with those present in the desti-
nation map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.

4. Select the From File to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.


5. Set the file containing the objects to compare:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.


The File Selection window opens.
b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.
The system proposes the files present in the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.

6. Set the destination map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.


The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.

The destination map must be different from the source map.


c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects present into a con-
tainer of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box.

7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
compared object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 144


CHANGE MAP

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Privileged *, Superuser

* The Privileged user cannot delete the map.

The Change Map command changes or deletes the map.


With details it is possible:
To close the open map and opening another one (pag.145)
To delete a map (pag.146).

To close the open map and opening another one

1. Select the Map > Change Map command.


The Change Map window opens (Fig.22).

2. Select a map from the list.


If the map has access:
Read-Write, press the push-button:
Open Map READ/WRITE to open the map in Read-Write access.
Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
Read, press Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
The Open Map READ/WRITE push-button is not available.
The current map is closed and the new map is opened.
One's user and operating level are kept also in the new map.

Fig.22 Change Map window

List of
maps (1)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 145


Fig.22 notes

(1) For each map, it is displayed in the column:


Map name. Name of the map.
Permission. Type of available access:
Read/Write; it is possible to open the map with Read-Write or Read Only access.
Read; it is possible to open the map only with Read Only access (the Read-Write ac-
cess is already occupied).
Comment. Additional notes.
The wording (Current Map) indicates the currently open map.

To delete a map

Operation available only to Superuser.


It is not possible to delete a map with Read access or the current map.

1. Select the Map > Change Map command.


The Change Map window opens (Fig.22).

2. Select a map with Read-Write access from the list.


3. Press Delete Map and confirm.
The map is removed from the list.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 146


EXIT

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Exit command closes the UX Map Manager window and then the NMS5UX-B graphic interface.

To close the UX Map Manager window

1. Select the Map > Exit command or press .


A confirmation window opens.

2. Press Ok.

The closure of the UX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open
window of NMS5UX-B (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 147


EDIT

The Edit menu contains the following commands:

Add (pag.149). It creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
Delete (pag.156). It deletes the objects from the map.
Modify/View (pag.157). It displays and/or modifies the characteristics of the objects.
Information (pag.160). It displays the information of the symbol.
Graphical Symbol Properties (pag.162). It displays the graphic parameters of the symbol.
Find (pag.163). It searches an object of the map.
Arrange Symbols (pag.164). It aligns vertically/horizontally the symbols.
Generate Info for WEB (pag.165). It checks the database information necessary to the RAN
(Remote Access NMS5UX) application.
Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers (pag.166). It sets the size of the con-
tainers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.

These commands are used to represent graphically the equipment network in the maps and to provide
to NMS5UX-B the parameters to manage and control each single object.

Before using them, it is suggested to read the Graphic network representation (pag.78) where the modal-
ities to configure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 148


ADD

System access Read-Write


User profile Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Add command creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
With details it is possible:
To create Container objects (pag.149)
To create NE objects managed with SNMP protocol (pag.150)
To create virtual NE objects managed with SNMP protocol (pag.152)
To create NE objects managed with Legacy protocol (pag.152)
To create virtual NE objects managed with Legacy protocol (pag.153)
To create Generic Symbol objects (pag.154)
To create Link objects (pag.154)
To create Label objects (pag.155)
To create Container, NE (SNMP), Link and Label objects described in a file (pag.155)

Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the par. Rules for the creation of the objects (pag.82).

For more information about:


Container object go to pag.79.
NE object go to pag.22 and pag.79
Generic Symbol object go to pag.81
Link object go to pag.81
Label object go to pag.81
Add Network From File functionality go to pag.97.

To create Container objects

It is possible to create all the wished Container objects.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the container.

2. Select the Edit > Add > Container command or press .


The Add Container window opens.

3. Type the name of the container (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 48 char-
acters) in the Label box.
The name will be displayed under the symbol of the container.

4. In the Type area, select the type of container you wish to create among: Subnetwork, Station, Substa-
tion.
5. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters).
The setting of this parameter is optional.

6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The container is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the
symbol in any point of the View area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 149


To create NE object managed with SNMP protocol

The maximum number of SNMP equipment objects that can be created depends on one's codeword.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the NE.

2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > SNMP Managed command or press .
The Add Equipment window opens.

3. Type, in the IP Address box, the IP address of the NE.


If you wish to create a:
ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node object, type the IP address of the main equipment of the node.
PMP object, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to the master
station.
The IP address set in this field must CORRESPOND to the IP address of the NE, locally defined. If the
address do not coincide, it will not possible to send commands to the NE itself.

After the creation of the NE, the IP address cannot be modified.


It is not possible to assign the same IP address to two different NEs, even of different type.
If a NE object with the IP address is already present in the map, the values assigned to the same object
present in the other map will be automatically displayed in all the other fields of the Add Equipment
window.
4. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the NE (alphanumeric string of max. 32 char-
acters)
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
It is possible to assign, as logical address, the same value to the IP Address, while it is not possible to
assign the same logical address to two NEs.

5. ONLY if the new NE is inserted into a OSI network, activate the Osi Address box and set the NSAP (Gos-
ip) address of the equipment, as pointed out to pag.151.
For the ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node objects, if the Osi Address box is activated, it is NECESSARY to
set the NSAP address of the main equipment of the node. During the first operation of Line Test or Con-
nect of the system towards the main equipment of the node, the NSAP address of the other equipment
belonging to the node will be automatically detected.

6. In the Type area, select the type of equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).

After the creation of the NE, the type cannot be modified.

7. ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Proxy Agent application is installed, activate
the Proxy Address box.
The box aside displays the default address, configured by the system administrator, with which the
equipment is acknowledged by Proxy Agent.
In order to modify the address, type in the box the new address of the machine to which the Proxy
Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment.
For the ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node objects, if the Proxy Address box is activated, the addresses by
which the equipment belonging to the node are acknowledged by the Proxy Agent are configured.

8. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters).


The setting of this parameter is optional.

9. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol
in any point of the View area.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status of the ex-
isting object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 150


NSAP (Gosip) Address

The NSAP Address, according to the GOSIP V2, is composed by two parts: IDP (Initial Domain Part) and
DSP (Domain Specific Part).

Each part is composed by parameters. The values of these parameters, represented by one or more bytes,
can be changed. Each byte is represented by means of two characters that are the exadecimal value of the
two byte nibbles as pointed out into Tab.11.

Tab.11 NSAP (Gosip) address

Byte Changeable
Part Parameter
number by the user
AFI (Authority and Format Identifier) 1 Yes
IDP
IDI (Initial Domain Identifier) 2 Yes
Ver (Version) 1 Yes
Auth (Authority) 3 Yes
Reserved 2 No
DSP Domain (Routing Domain) 2 Yes
Area 2 Yes
System ID (Network Element Identification) 6 Yes
Sel (Selector) 1 No

To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth, Domain, Area parameters (default part of the
NSAP Address)

1. Press Setup Default present into the Add Equipment window.


The system opens the Gosip Default Option window.
2. To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corre-
sponding byte/s.

3. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired
value from the list.
To add a value to the list:

a. Press Add.
The Domain Settings window opens.
b. Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination.
c. Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain and press OK.
To remove a value form the list:

a. Select the value to be removed and press Remove.

4. To change the Area parameter, press the arrow on the side of the box and select the desired value into
the list.
To add or remove a value from the list, execute the procedures pointed out for the Domain parameter.

5. Press OK.

To change the System ID parameter

1. Press Settings present into the Add Equipment window.


The system opens the Settings window.

2. Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose the System ID and press OK.
Into the text field on the side of the Settings push-button, the system points out the value of the set
System ID.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 151


To create virtual NE objects managed with SNMP protocol

It is possible to create all the wished SNMP virtual NE objects.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the virtual NE.

2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > SNMP Managed (Virtual) command.
The Add Equipment window opens.

3. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the virtual NE (alphanumeric string of max 32
characters).
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
It is not possible to assign the same logical address to two virtual NEs.

4. In the Type area, select the type of virtual equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).

After the creation of the virtual NE, the value cannot be modified.

5. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters).


The setting of this parameter is optional.

6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The virtual NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the
symbol in any point of the View area.

To create NE objects managed with Legacy protocol

The maximum number of Legacy NE objects that can be created depends on one's codeword.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the NE.

2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed command.
The subject command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment
have been installed.
The Add Equipment window opens.

3. Into the Physical Address box, type the physical address comprised between 2 and 60000 (the value 1
is not allowed), to be assigned to the new NE.

After the creation of the NE, the value can not be changed.
Press Auto, to set, as value of the parameter, the first available address. It is possible also to set a
value into the Physical Address field and then to press Auto; in this case, the system will automatically
display the first available address that follows the set value.
The physical address set into this field has to CORRESPOND to the NE address, locally defined. If the
addresses are not the same one, it will not be possible to forward any command to the NE itself.
It is not possible to assign the same address to two different NEs also if they are two different type ones.
If into an map there is already a NE object with the same physical Address set into the field, the system
will automatically point out, into all the other fields of the Add Equipment window, the values assigned
to the same object present into the other map.

4. Into the Logical Address text field, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with maximum 32 char-
acters) to be assigned to the new NE.
The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment.
It is possible to assign, as logic address, the same value assigned to the Physical Address parameter,
while it is not possible to assign the same logic address to two NEs.

5. Into the CS Ip Address box, type the IP address of the CommServer-S or of the IPBOX to which it is
(or it will be) connected the Legacy equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 152


The setting of this parameter is not mandatory but, if it is not set or it is not correctly set, it will not
be possible to forward any command (Connect, Line Test, etc.) toward the NE under examination.

6. Into the CS Port box, type the number of the port of the CommServer-S or of the IPBOX to which it is
(or it will be) connected the NE.

7. In the Type area, select the type of equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).

After the creation of the NE, the value cannot be modified.

8. ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Proxy Agent application is installed, activate
the Proxy Address box.
The box aside displays the default address, configured by the system administrator, with which the
equipment is acknowledged by Proxy Agent.
In order to modify the address, type in the box the new address of the machine to which the Proxy
Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment.

The Proxy Agent manages only G series Radio equipment with Legacy interface.

9. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters).


The setting of this parameter is optional.

10.Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol
in any point of the View area.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status of the ex-
isting object.

To create virtual NE objects managed with Legacy protocol

It is possible to create all the wished Legacy virtual NE objects.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the virtual NE.

2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual) command.
The subject command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment
have been installed.
The Add Equipment window opens.

3. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the virtual NE (alphanumeric string of max 32
characters)
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
It is not possible to assign the same logical address to two virtual NEs.

4. In the Type area, select the type of virtual equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).

After the creation of the virtual NE, the value cannot be modified.

5. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters).


The setting of this parameter is optional.

6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The virtual NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the
symbol in any point of the View area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 153


To create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)

It is possible to create all the wished Generic Symbol objects.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the Generic Symbol.

2. Select the Edit > Add > Generic Symbol command.


The Add Generic Object window opens.

3. Type, in the Label box, the name of the generic symbol (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters).
The name will be displayed under the generic symbol.
It is possible to assign the same name to more graphic symbols even of different type.

4. In the Group area, select the group where the generic symbol is contained.

5. In the Object area, select the generic symbol you wish to create.

6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The Generic Symbol is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move
the symbol in any point of the View area.

To create Link objects (connection)

It is possible to create all the wished Link objects.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the Link.

2. Select the two objects among which you wish to create the connection.
The operation is not executed if selected:
A container and a NE or Generic Symbol
Two containers
A single object
More than two objects

3. Select the Edit > Add > Link command.


The Add Generic Object window opens.

4. Type, in the Label box, the name of the connection (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters).
It is possible to assign the same name to more Links even of different type.

5. Activate the Show Label box if you wish that the name of the connection is displayed in the map.
The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/Hide
Link Label (see pag.170/Tab.12).
6. In the Connection type area, select the type of connection.

7. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters).


The setting of this parameter is optional.

8. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The connection line is displayed between the selected objects.
If one of the two object is moved, the line automatically adapted according to the move.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 154


To create Label objects (wordings)

It is possible to create all the wished Label objects.

1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the wording.

2. Select the Edit > Add > Label command.


The Add Label window opens.

3. Type, in the Label box, an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters.


It is possible to insert the wording more times.

4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The object is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol
in any point of the View area.

To create Container, NE (SNMP), Link and Label objects described in a file

Before executing the operation, it is necessary:


To create the file (csv format) you wish to use for the automatic creation of the ob-
jects, as pointed out at pag.97.
To copy the file (.csv) to the server where the NMS5UX-B system is installed (default
directory opt/nms5ux/data/files).

1. Select the Edit > Add > Network From File command.
The Add Network From File window opens.

2. Select the wished file (.csv format) in the Files list.


The list points out the files present in the predefined directory (pointed out in the Selection box). Modify
the path, if necessary.

3. Press Ok.
The Add From File Report - <path/name of the selected file> window is displayed where, for every cre-
ated object, is pointed out in the column:
Category and Type. Object type.
Name. Logical address (NE) or name of the object.
Message. Self-explanatory message about the result of the object creation.
If the total operation of object creation:
Was successful, the objects described in the file will be present in the UX Map Manager.
Was failed, the message SYNTAX ERROR - operation ABORTED is displayed in the Add From File
Report... window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 155


DELETE

System access Read-Write


User profile Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Delete command deletes an object from the map.

To delete an object from the map

1. Into the UX Map Manager window select the object you wish to delete.
Object:
Container. It can be deleted only if it does not contain objects.
Network Element. If present only in one map, can be deleted only if it is in disconnected status
(brown symbol).
If the object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it is in connected
status, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted
only if in disconnected status.
The virtual NE and NE WEB Generic type can be always deleted.
If the object is managed even by the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager application, first it
must be deleted from the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager Map window and then it can be
deleted from the map.
Generic Symbol, Link or Label. It can be always deleted.
A connection is automatically deleted even when one of the two symbols, which is connected to,
is removed.

2. Select the Edit > Delete command or press the right mouse button, select Delete (command not
available if a Link object is selected) and confirm.
The object is removed from the map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 156


MODIFY/VIEW

System access Reading Read Only


Reading/Writing Read-Write
User profile Reading Entry, Normal
Reading/Writing Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Modify/View command displays/modifies the characteristics of the objects.


With details it is possible:
To verify/modify the parameters of a Container objects (pag.157)
To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element objects (pag.157)
To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol objects (pag.158)
To verify/modify the parameters of a Link objects (pag.159)
To verify/modify the parameters of a Label objects (pag.159)

The values of some parameters cannot be changed. If it was necessary to modify these parameters, it
is suggested to delete the object and then re-create it assigning the new values to the parameters.

If the same object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the parameter values of
such an object into a map, the system automatically changes the values of the parameters relevant to the
same object into the other map.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Container object

1. Select the wished Container object.


2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Container command or press the right mouse button and select
Modify/View.
The Container Properties window opens.
Box/area:
Label. Container name.
Type. Container type.
Comment. Additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed
out to pag.149.
3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
In the UX Map Manager window, the container assumes the new characteristics.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object

1. Select the wished NE or Virtual NE object.

2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Network Element command or press the right mouse button and
select Modify/View.
The Equipment Properties window opens.
If a following objects is selected:
NE managed with SNMP protocol is displayed in the box/area:
IP Address, the IP address of the NE
Logical Address, the logical address of the NE

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 157


Osi Address, the NSAP (Gosip) address of NE
Type, the type of NE
Proxy Address, address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming
from the NE.
Comment, additional information
It is always possible to change the Logical Address, Type, Proxy Address, Comment parameters
while the Osi Address parameter can be changed ONLY if the NE is in disconnected status (brown
icon). The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.150.
The change of the Logical Address parameter involves the change of the name even for the cop-
ies of the same NE present in the additional applications of the supervision system (for example,
Ring Manager, VLAN Manager, RAN, etc.).
It is not possible to change the Ip Address parameter.
Virtual NE managed with SNMP protocol is displayed in the box/area:
Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
Type, the type of NE
Comment, additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one
pointed out to pag.152.
NE managed with Legacy protocol is displayed in the box/area:
Physical Address, the physical address of the NE
Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
CS Ip Address, the IP address of the CS or IPBOX to which it is connected the NE
CS Port, the number of the port of the CS or IPBOX to which it is connected the NE
Type, the type of NE
Proxy Address, address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming
from the NE.
Comment, additional information
It is always possible to change the Logical Address, Comment and Proxy Address parameter,
while the CS Ip Address, CS Port parameters can be changed ONLY if the NE is in disconnected
status (brown icon). The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to
pag.152.
It is not possible to change the Physical Address, Type parameters.
Virtual NE managed with Legacy protocol is displayed in the box/area:
Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
Type, the type of NE
Comment, additional information
It is possible to change the Logical Address and Comment parameter. The setting mode of the
parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.153.
It is not possible to change the Type parameter.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).

To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object

1. Select the wished Generic Symbol object.

2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Generic Symbol command or press the right mouse button and
select Modify/View.
The Generic Symbol Properties window opens.
Box/area:
Label. Generic symbol name.
Group. Group containing the symbol.
Object. Symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 158


It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed
out to pag.154.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
In the UX Map Manager window, the generic symbol assumes the new characteristics.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Link object

1. Select the wished Link object.

2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Link command.


The Link Properties window opens.
Box/area:
Label and Show Label. Name of the connection and if this is displayed in the map are respectively
indicated.
The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/
Hide Link Label (see pag.170/Tab.12).
Connection type. Connection type.
Comment. Additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed
out to pag.154.
3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
In the UX Map Manager window, the connection assumes the new characteristics.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Label object

1. Select the wished Label object.

2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Label command or press the right mouse button and select Modi-
fy/View.
The Label Properties window opens.
The wording is displayed in the Label box.

3. To modify the parameter, type the new value (alphanumeric string of max 50 characters) in the Label
box.

4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The label is modified in the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 159


INFORMATION

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Information command displays the information of the symbol.


With details it is possible:
To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence, In-
correct Upload and the notes) of a symbol (pag.160).
To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol (pag.161).

The command is not available for the Generic Symbol, Label or Link objects.

To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of


LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol

1. Select the wished object.

2. Select the Edit > Information command or press the right mouse button and select Information.
The Information window opens, where the symbol characteristics is displayed (Fig.73).

Fig.23 Information window

Marking status
of the " alarms",
of the signalling
of "LCT presence"
and "Incorrect
Upload" (1)

Symbol
informative
note (2)

Fig.23 notes

(1) If the selection is an object:


Network Element. Box:
Ack Alarm - active ( ). In the selected NE, there is at least a not marked alarm (cur-
rent and/or in the alarm history).
To mark the alarm, open the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) and/or the Cur-
rent Alarm Browser window (Fig.41).
Ack Alarm - inactive. All the possible alarms are marked.
Ack LCT - active ( ). From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE
has been opened, the LCT connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality
(LCT presence signalling).
To mark the signalling, open the equipment window relevant to the NE.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 160


Ack LCT - inactive. From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE has
been opened LCT has not connected in Configuration modality.
Incorrect Upload - active ( ). The last Configuration Upload is failed or ended with
problems.
The signalling is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of
Configuration Upload.
Incorrect Upload - active. The last Configuration Upload ended successfully.
For the virtual NE the Acknowledge Information area is not meaningful.
Network Element of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type. Box:
Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least a NE of the selected node, has at least one not
marked alarm.
Ack Alarm - inactive,. No NE of the selected node, has not marked alarms.
Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node, has the signalling of LCT
presence.
Ack LCT - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has the signalling of LCT presence.
Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node, has the signalling
of Incorrect Upload.
Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has the signalling of Incorrect
Upload.
Container. Box:
Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least a NE, present in the selected container, has at least
one not marked alarm.
Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has not marked
alarms.
Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE, present in the selected container, has the sig-
nalling of LCT presence.
Ack LCT - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has the signalling of LCT
presence.
Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE, present in the selected container, has
the signalling of Incorrect Upload.
Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has the signal-
ling of Incorrect Upload.

(2) If selected, an NE object, the Note area reports the possible informative notes inserted by the user.

To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol

1. Select the wished NE object.

2. Select the Edit > Information command or press the right mouse button and select Information.
The Information window opens (Fig.23).

3. In the Note area, add/modify/delete the text (max 50 characters).

4. Press OK.
If some notes are present, the symbol , is added next to the equipment symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 161


GRAPHICAL SYMBOL PROPERTIES

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Graphical Symbol Properties command displays the graphic parameters assigned by the system to
the symbol.

The command is not available for the Link symbol.

To verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol

1. Select the wished symbol.

2. Select the Edit > Graphical Symbol Properties command.


The Graphical Symbol Properties window opens.
Box:
Selection Name. Graphic name of the symbol
Object Properties. Graphic parameters of the symbol
The parameters cannot be modified.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 162


FIND

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Find command searches a symbol in the map using, as criterion, an alphanumeric string that consti-
tutes one part or the whole name, the IP address or notes.

To search a symbol in the map

1. Select the Edit > Find command.


The Find window opens.

2. Type in the Text to find: box the alphanumeric wording relevant to the NE you wish to find.
It is possible to use the asterisk wild-card character (*). For example, typing in the box the letter:
p, the equipment with name, address or notes equal to p will be searched.
p*, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p will be searched.
p*o, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p and ending with o will be searched.

3. Select, in the Search for area, the field where the alphanumeric string must be searched:
Symbol Name. Name of the symbol.
IP Address. IP address of the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).
Note. Additional notes for the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).

4. Press Find.
In the Search result area, there are as many rows as the objects, present in the map, that satisfy search
conditions.
For each object, the name and the position (map/container/) of the relevant symbol.

5. In order to bring the UX Map Manager window with a a highlighted symbol in foreground, select the
relevant row in the Search result area and, then, press Open or double click on the row itself.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 163


ARRANGE SYMBOLS

System access Read-Write


User profile Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Arrange Symbols command aligns the symbols.

To align the symbols

1. Select the symbols you wish to align.


The first selected symbol is taken as reference for the alignment.

2. To align:
Vertically the symbols, select the Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical command or press .
Horizontally the symbols, select the Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal command or press
.

According to the selected command/push-button, the symbols are aligned vertically or horizontally.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 164


GENERATE INFO FOR WEB

System access Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Generate Info for WEB command checks the database information necessary to the RAN. This op-
eration re-alignment the information between the NMS5UX-B and RAN application.

For more information about the RAN application refer to the specific documentation.

To check the database information necessary to the RAN

1. Select the Edit > Generate Info for WEB command.


The information present in the database is generated.
At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 165


SET CURRENT WINDOW GEOMETRY FOR ALL CONTAINERS

System access Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command allows to set the size of the contain-
ers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.

To set the size of the containers windows

1. To resize the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) at will.

2. Select the Edit > Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command.
When a container is selected, the UX Map Manager window will keep the size set at step 1.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 166


VIEW

The View menu contains the following commands:

Show/Hide Map Tree (pag.168). It hides/displays the Map area.


Show/Hide Platform Status (pag.169). It hides/displays the platform status bar.
Show/Hide Link Label (pag.170). It hides/displays the labels of the Link objects.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 167


SHOW/HIDE MAP TREE

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Map Tree command hides/displays the Map area (pag.32).

To display/hide the Map area

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press .


The Map area is hidden.

2. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press again to display the area again.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 168


SHOW/HIDE PLATFORM STATUS

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Platform Status command hides/displays the platform status bar (pag.45)

To display/hide the platform status bar

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press .


The platform status bar is displayed.

2. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press again to hide the bar again.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 169


SHOW/HIDE LINK LABEL

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The command Show/Hide Link Label hides/shows the names of the Link objects in the View area of the
UX Map Manager window.

The display status of the names of the Link objects is pointed out by the presence of the wording [Link
Label Off] in the status bar.
In detail, if the wording is:
Present, points out that the names of the Link objects ARE NOT displayed in the View area.
Not present, points out that the names of the Link objects ARE displayed in the View area.

The display of the name of a Link object is influenced even by the setting of the relevant parameter Show
Label.
This parameter is set during the creation of the object (see pag.154). Then, it can be changed in any mo-
ment (see pag.159).
Tab.12 points out the interaction between the setting of the parameter Show Label and the display status
of the names of the Link objects in a map for an hypothetical object Link A.

Tab.12 Display of the name of the Link objects in the map

Object Link A - Display of the names of the Display of the name of the object
parameter Show Label Link objects in the map * Link A in the map

Active Active Name displayed

Inactive Active Name not displayed

Active Inactive * Name not displayed

Inactive Inactive * Name not displayed

* The wording [Link Label Off] is present in the status bar of the UX Map Manager window.

To show/hide the names of the Link objects

1. Select the command View > Show/Hide Link Label or press .


At each selection of the command/button, the wording [Link Label Off] appears and disappears from
the status bar of the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 170


PERFORMANCE

The Performance menu contains the following commands:

Performance Monitoring Read (pag.172). It updates the results of the PM measures of an


equipment.
Performance Monitoring (pag.173). It displays the results of the PM measures of an equip-
ment.
Old Performance Monitoring (pag.177). It displays the results of the PM measures of an
equipment, saved and restored from tape or disk.
Export Performance Monitoring (pag.179). It saves on file the results of the PM measures of
one or more equipment of the same type.
View/Modify P.M. Status (pag.181). It displays the status and allows activating/deactivating
the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type contemporarily.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 171


PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring Read command updates the results of the PM measures of an equipment.
The updating request is sent to the controller of the equipment.

To update the results of the PM measures of an equipment

Operation meaningful only for the NE in connected status.


For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operation is executed for all the equipment
of the node.

1. Select the desired NE.

2. Select the Performance > Performance Monitoring Read command.


At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 172


PERFORMANCE MONITORING

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment.
With details it is possible:
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours)
and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters (pag.173).
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15
minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters (pag.176).

The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2
Node type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - pag.48/
pag.49).

For more information about the PM measures go to pag.130.

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily


records (24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control
parameters

1. Select the NE.


If the type of selected NE does not support the PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.
2. Select the Performance > Performance Monitoring command or press .
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to
verify the results of the PM measures is required.
In the boxes:
Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is
set).
Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the duration of the
period (by default, 30 days is set) is displayed.

3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Per-
formance Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically
removed.

4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:


Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of
the selected item (see step 7).
Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.

5. Press OK.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.

6. Select the TPC menu.


All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(points where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording)
available for the selected equipment are selected.
The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 173


Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.

7. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.

All the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters
Fig.24 shows an example.
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange, it becomes
red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in anyone of the other TPs.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.

Fig.24 Graphic Performance Monitoring window

Caracteristic of the equipment Each column of


of the selected time interval Menu the graph represents Characteristics
and of the graph (1) bar (2) a daily record (3) of the records (4)

Characteristics of the selected control Date of the record where the mouse
parameters and relevant to the record is placed and which the characteristics of
where the mouse is placed (5) the control parameters below are refered to

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 174


Fig.24 notes

(1) In order:
Type and logical address of the equipment.
Start date and End date.
Type of displayed record (Daily, Primary).
Type of graph (Histogram, Chart, Chart Comp).

(2) Menu:
File > Exit. It closes the window.
Option > Deselect all TPC. It deselects all the selected control parameters.
Option > Thresholds. It displays in the graph a broken line that represents the threshold val-
ue of each selected control parameter.
Each broken line will have the colour that represents the parameter in the graph.
Option > Type image. It modifies the type of graph. In detail:
Histogram, graph with histograms.
Chart, line graph.
Chart Comp., compressed line graph.
TPC. List of the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and
of the measure points (TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected
type of equipment.
Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.

(3) The window displays the records contained in the set time period. They are displayed from the old-
est to the newest one. Use the scrolling bar to move among the records.
Each control parameter, within the record column, is identified by a colour. The colour legend is
displayed in the Legend and measure.... area

(4) Each record is identified by the relevant date (day/month/year).


The result of all the active measures is pointed out by a coloured wording under the date of the
record. In detail:
Not available. The record is not available, as in the observation period under examination no
measure was active.
No error (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measures are not errored.
Above Thrs (red). The record has been completely acquired and at least a control parameter
has exceeded the relevant threshold value.
Besides the record, in this case, the NE sends an alarm of exceeding of the daily record that
is stored in the alarm history.
Below Thrs (yellow). The record has been completely acquired and the measured control pa-
rameters have not exceeded their threshold value.
Lost (black). The record is not arrived to the main controller of the NE for example because
the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before sending the record
itself or due to generic hardware/software troubles.
Incompl (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding ob-
servation period.
The record of measure start is always in this status. The daily record assumes this status
also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.

The daily record of the current date will be always incomplete as the daily records are
acquired at 23.59 of each day.
Restarted (black). The record was lost due to a reset of the NE.
When the NE has a software restart and verifies that, for a given measure point, the measure
is active, all the records of that measure point will result in this status.

(5) For each control parameter, the following columns indicate:


Value, value of the control parameter. The colour of the number that represents the value
indicates the exceeding of the threshold:
Red. Value greater than the set threshold value.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 175


Yellow. Value lower than the set threshold value.
White. Threshold value not set (threshold inactive).
The dash (-) indicates that the value is not available.
Col., colour that represents the parameter within the graph
State Rec., status of the record relevant to the control parameter. For the description of the
different statuses, see note (4).
Threshold, threshold level over which the relevant alarm is activated.
The wording Disable indicates that the threshold is inactive.
Description, name of the measure point (TP) and relevant to the control parameter.
The control parameters changes according to the TP. Their description is reported in the
equipment user Manual relevant to the type of NE which the measure is referred to.
The window displays contemporarily all the records relevant to the period set at the begin-
ning of the procedure.
RLT (dbm), power threshold level.

The field is displayed and it is meaningful only for power control parameters (e.g. RLTS,
RLTM, etc.).

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in pri-


mary records (15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the
control parameters

1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window (see pag.173).


2. Double click on the record relevant to the day whose primary records you wish to display.
Another Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.
In this window, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the
selected day.
The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Fig.24, the only difference is that
instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary record (15 minutes).

3. To return to the displaying of the primary records, double click on any point of the window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 176


OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Old Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment,
saved and restored from tape or disk.
With details it is possible:
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours)
present in the Old Performance Monitoring table (pag.177).
To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15
minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table (pag.178).

The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2
Node type.

In the Old Performance Monitoring table are stored the results of the PM measures saved (see pag.426)
and restored (see pag.427) from tape or disk.

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily


records (24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table

1. Select the NE.


If the type of selected NE does not support PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.

2. Select the Performance > Old Performance Monitoring command.


The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the time period, for which you wish to verify
the results of the PM measures, is required.
In the boxes:
Date Reference, the date (day/month/year) of period start (by default the current day is select-
ed) is displayed.
Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the period duration
is displayed (by default 30 days is set).

3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
Remember that it is possible to display, at most, the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day).

4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:


Activate the box if you wish, on the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters, compatible with the measure unit of the selected item (see step
7) are automatically selected.
Deactivate the box if you wish that, on the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.

5. Press OK.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window opens.

If, at the opening of the window, the table is empty, it is necessary to restore from the backup file
saved before the list of the wished measures (see pag.427).
They will remain available in the Old Performance Monitoring table and in the Graphic Performance
Monitoring - OLD window, until a different list of measures is not restored.

6. Select the TPC menu.


All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and the measure points
(TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected equipment are listed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 177


The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.
Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.

7. Select the control parameters for which you wish the display the results of the PM measures.

In the same graph not all the control parameters of a TP can be displayed. They have been subdi-
vided according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.

The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window displays the results of the selected control param-
eters.
The items of the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window and their description are the same
shown in Fig.24.

When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange it becomes
red. The selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TP.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter will not be
available (wording in grey colour).

In order to display the results of parameter with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command)
and, then, select the new parameters.

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in pri-


mary records (15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table

1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (see pag.177).

2. Double click on the record relevant to the day for which you wish to display the primary records.
An addition Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window opens.
In this, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the selected
day.
The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Fig.24, the only difference is that,
instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary record (15 minutes).

3. In order to come back to the displaying of the primary records, double click on any point of the window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 178


EXPORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Export Performance Monitoring command saves on file the results of the PM measures of one or
more equipment of the same type. Then, during the operation, it is possible to forward the file to a user,
via e-mail.

The command is available for the virtual NE objects.


For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the node
equipment.

To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of


the same type

1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type.

It is possible to select a maximum of 100 equipment.

2. Select the Performance > Export Performance Monitoring command.


The Export window opens.
Under the window title, it is pointed out the NE type.

3. Position the pointer into the TPclass area and press the right mouse button.
The system displays the list of the measurements foreseen for the selected type of NE.

4. Choose one measurement type from the list.


Into the Termination Point (TP) area, the system points out the relevant measuring points.
5. Choose one or more measuring points for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved
on file. It is possible to select more records.

6. Select the option:


Daily, to save on file the daily records relevant to the selected measuring point/s.
Primary, to save on file the primary records.

7. Set the date (into the Date boxes) and the time (into the Time boxes) respectively for the starting (Start
Date Time box) and for the ending (Stop Date Time box) of the time for which the results of the PM
measurements have to be saved.
The supervisory system has at disposal the results of the PM measurements relevant to the last 180
days (6 months).

8. Type the directory and the file name, for which the operator wants to save the data, into the File Name
box.
The system provides a default directory and name composed by specific information, such as, for in-
stance, the date, the time, the NE logic address.
The format of the provided default name can be changed by the Superuser.

9. ONLY if the user wants to forward the file to another user, it is necessary to set the name of the user
into the Remote Address box.
If the user positions the pointer on the text field and press the right mouse button, the system displays
a pre-defined list of users. Select the desired user.
In this case, the file will be as saved into the pre-defined directory as forwarded to the set user.

The predefined list of users has to be set and later it can be changed by the Superuser.
To be able to forward the file, the system administrator has to configure properly the mail server.

10.Press OK.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 179


The system displays the Preview window that points out the resuming of the executed setting opera-
tions.
Then, in the lower part of the window, the system points out the total number of records (Total Record
Number box) and the number of records that contain errored data (Records with counters box).

The system can display an error message that points out that the number of record present into the
set time is too high. This situation is caused because the system stores into each file a maximum limit
N of records. The limit N can be changed by the Superuser.
The data are saved in ASCII format that can be recognized by a great number of text processing pro-
grams and databases.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 180


VIEW/MODIFY P.M. STATUS

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The View/Modify P.M. Status command displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM
measures of one or more equipment of the same type contemporarily.
With details it is possible:
To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more equipment of the same
type (pag.181)
To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same
type (pag.183)
To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the
same type (pag.183)

The command ais not available for the virtual NE objects.


For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operations will be executed on all the node
equipment.

To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs
of the same type

1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type.

2. Select the Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status command.


The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens, where the operating status of the measure points is dis-
played (Fig.25).

If more NE objects of different type are selected, the PM measures relevant to the first type of se-
lected NE are displayed. For example, if selected in order, one NE of SDH type, one NE of FAM type and
one NE of PDH type, on the selection of the command, the PM measures that characterize the SDH
equipment are displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 181


Fig.25 View/Modify P.M. Status window

In this area, it is possible to filter the measure This area (Termination This area points out the
points displayed in the area are the right side Point) points out the measure Menu detail of the executed
(Termination point area) (1) points (2) bar (3) operations and their result

Fig.25 notes

(1) Area:
Equipment. Equipment selected in the map. Select the option:
All Equipment, to display the measure points relevant to all the equipment in the Ter-
mination Point area.
Selected Equipment, to display the measure points relevant only to the selected
equipment in the Termination Point area.
The option is available only after having selected at least one equipment.
Termination Point Class. Types of measures relevant to the type of equipment selected in
the map. Select the option:
All TP Class, to display the measure points relevant to all the types of measure in the
Termination Point area.
Selected TP Class, to display the measure points relevant only to the selected types
of measure in the Termination Point area.
The option is available only after having selected at least one type of measure.
Termination Point Instances. Status of the measure point. Activate the box:
Running Counters to display the active measure point in the Termination Point area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 182


Not Running Counters to display the inactive measure point in the Termination Point area.

(2) For each measure point, the following column points out:
Logical Addr., the logical address of the equipment.
TP Class, the name of the type of measure.
TP Instance, name of the measure point.
Status, status of the measure: active (wording: Running), inactive (wording Not running).

(3) Menu:
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Start. It activates the PM measures.
Action > Stop. It deactivates the PM measures.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more
equipment of the same type

1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type.


2. Select the Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status command.
The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens (Fig.25).

3. To activate:
All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action >
Start > All command.
The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area select the
Action > Start > Filtered command.
The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Start > Selected command.
In the Message area, the result of the operation is displayed.

To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more
equipment of the same type

1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type.

2. Select the Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status command.


The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens (Fig.25).

3. To deactivate:
All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action >
Stop > All command.
The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Stop > Filtered command.
The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Stop > Selected command.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 183


CONFIGURATION

The Configuration menu contains the following commands:

Equipment Info (pag.185). It displays the characteristics and the functional status of the
equipment.
Radio Certificate (pag.187). It records the characteristics of the radio equipment.
Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory (pag.188). It displays the hardware version and software
version of the Legacy equipment present into the open map.
Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory (pag.191). It displays the units list of the Legacy equipment
present into the open map.
SNMP-Software Inventory (pag.194). It displays the software version and the units list
(where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment present into the open map.
SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration (pag.200). It displays the settings of the communica-
tion ports of the SNMP equipment present into the open map.
SNMP-NE PPP Interfaces (pag.204). It displays the settings relevant to the PPP communica-
tion ports of an equipment.
SNMP-NE Routing Table (pag.205). It displays the Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress of an equipment.
SNMP-Hw Inventory (pag.209). It displays the hardware version of the SNMP equipment
present into the open map.
SNMP-NE Backup/Restore (pag.213). It displays the backup files of the SNMP equipment
present into the open map.
Legacy-Alarm Average (pag.219). It displays the mean of the alarms per seconds sent by the
Legacy equipment and received by the NMS5UX-B system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 184


EQUIPMENT INFO

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Equipment Info command displays the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment.

To verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment

1. Select the wished NE object.

2. Select the Configuration > Equipment Info command or press the right mouse button and select
Equipment Information.
The Equipment Information window opens, where the characteristics and the functional status of the
equipment are displayed (Fig.26).

Selecting more NE symbols and choosing this command, more Equipment Information window open for
each selected NE.

Fig.26 Equipment Information window

Characteristics
and funtional
status of
the NE (1)

Press this push-button


to update the data

Press this push-button


to close the window

Fig.26 notes

(1) Option:
Physical Address. Physical address of the NE.
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
Type. Type of NE.
Equipment status. Status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system.
Alarm status. Functional status (alarms) of the NE.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 185


The severity level of the alarm present on the NE is displayed. If more alarms of different
severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm will be displayed.
LCT Presence. Status of the connection between the local program and the NE. Value:
Absent. The LCT user is not connected to the equipment.
LCT Config. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality.
LCT Monitor. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
Alarm history. Number of alarms relevant to the NE, stored in the alarm history. Box:
Total. Total number of alarms.
Ack. Number of marked alarms.
Not Ack. Number of not marked alarms.
Current alarms. Number of alarms currently present on NE.

If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the displayed information is
referred in part to the node (Physical Address, Logical Address and Type) and in part to the sum of
the information of the equipment belonging to the node (Equipment status, Alarm status, LCT Pres-
ence, Alarm history and Current alarms).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 186


RADIO CERTIFICATE

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced *, Privileged *, Superuser *

* The recording data, if modified, can be saved only the Superuser and by the users with privileged and
advanced profiles.

The Radio Certificate command records the characteristics of the radio equipment.
With details is possible:
To verify/modify the data registration (conformity certificate) of a radio (pag.187)
To save to file or print the conformity certificate of a radio (pag.187)

To verify/modify the data registration (conformity certificate) of a radio

1. Select the radio equipment you wish to record.

2. Select the Configuration > Radio Certificate command.


The EqpInfoPage window opens where all the characteristics of the radio (conformity certificate) are
displayed.

3. To enter a value or modify the existing one, select the relevant box and type the new value.

4. Press Save.
The certificate is saved in the database of the system.

To save to file or print the conformity certificate of a radio

1. Select the radio equipment you wish to record.

2. Select the Configuration > Radio Certificate command.


The EqpInfoPage window opens.

3. To save to file the data, press Print to File.


During the saving, the Printing to file field is displayed which displays the path/filename where the data
are saved (default usr/tmn5ux/log/EqpInfo.log).
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To print the data, press Print to Printer.


The certificate is printed on the default printer.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 187


LEGACY-HW/SW EDITION INVENTORY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command displays the hardware version and software version
of the Legacy equipment present into the open map.
With details it is possible:
To verify the hardware and software version of the objects relevant to the Legacy equipment
present into the open map (pag.188)
To save/print the list of the objects (pag.189)
To filter/order the list of the objects (pag.189)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been
installed.

To verify the hardware and software version of the objects relevant to the
Legacy equipment present into the open map

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command.


The Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window opens, where the characteristics of the hardware and software
are displayed (Fig.27).

Fig.27 Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window

Menu
bar (1)

Objects
list (2)

Status
bar (3)

Fig.27 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Print/Save. It prints/saves on a file the information.
File > Close. It closes the window.
View > Set Filter. It filters/orders the objects list.
View > Refresh Info. It refreshes the information present into the window.
Help > On usage. It opens the on-line manual.

(2) Each NE is seen by the supervisory system as an assembly of objects that represent one or more
physical parts of the NE itself. More detailed information concerning the objects that characterize
each single type of NE are reported into the relevant equipment manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 188


Into the table, one record is dedicated to each object. Such a record contains the following infor-
mation:
Equipment. Legacy equipment type that contains the object.
Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object.
Object name. Object name.
Slot. Topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter and eventually by
a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information.
Hw/Sw Edition. Edition number of the hardware and of the software relevant to the physical
unit coupled with the object to which it is referred the record.

The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects at the selec-
tion of the command.

(3) Into the status bar, the system points out the following information:
The number of the displayed records (xx records).
The activation of one or more filters.
The date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed the window.

To save/print the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command.


The Hw/Sw Edition inventory window opens (Fig.27).
2. To print or save to a file:
The displayed records, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters
are not active, the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database.
A group of records, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected Items com-
mand.
The Output Device Selection window opens.
3. To print the data:

a. Select the Output To Printer option.


In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:
a. Select the Output To File option.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To filter/order the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command.


The Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window opens (Fig.27).

2. Select the View > Set Filter command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 189


The Set Filter window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
Match Object Type. Object of a NE.
To set the criterion:
Select the NE type into the Equipment Type list.
Select the desired object into the Object type list.
It is possible to set a single object class at a time or all the classes at the same time
choosing the All Objects option.
Match Address. NE logic address
To set the criterion type the NE address into the text field and press Add. The system inserts
the value into the area placed under the Match Address box.
The user can delete from the list a single option pressing, after having selected such an option,
the Remove push-button or he can delete all the options at the same time pressing Remove
All.
It is possible to use the wild character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the text field:
12 the system will display, into the window, the NE with address12.
12* the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 12 (12, 120, etc.).
1*2 the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 1 and ends with 2
(12,102, 112, etc.).
Match Edition. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the edition of the hardware and/or
of the software of the unit, executing the following procedure:
Type into the first text field (max 2 numbers) the edition number of the hardware and/or type
into the remaining 3 boxes (placed under the symbol /) the edition number (max. 2 characters
for each box) of the software.
To execute a general search, use the wild character asterisk (*).
The value 0/0.0.0 points out that the edition of the hardware and/or of the software relevant to
the unit under examination is unknown.
Match Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the ob-
ject.
The setting mode of the filter is the same one described for the Match Address criterion.
Sort by. To order the records with respect to the parameters:.
Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object.
Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the ob-
ject.
Hw Edition. Edition number of the hardware relevant to the physical unit coupled with the
object to which it is referred the record.
Object Name. Object name.
Sw Edition. Edition number of the software relevant to the physical unit coupled with the
object to which it is referred the record.
To set the ordering criterion, activate the desired option.
3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays in the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden
ones.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the command) and Help (it opens the
on-line manual) push-buttons.
When the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 190


LEGACY-PHYSICAL UNIT INVENTORY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command displays the units list of the Legacy equipment present
into the open map.
With details it is possible:
To verify the objects list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map (pag.191)
To save/print the list of the objects (pag.192)
To modify the identification code of the unit (pag.192)
To filter/order the list of the objects (pag.193)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been
installed.

To verify the objects list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command.


The Physical Unit Inventory window opens, where the characteristics of the objects relevant of the Leg-
acy equipment present into the open map are displayed (Fig.28).

Fig.28 Physical Unit Inventory window

Menu
bar (1)

Objects
list (2)

Status
bar (3)

Fig.28 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Print/Save. It prints/saves on a file the information.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Set Unit Code. It changes the identification code of the object.
View > Set Filter. It filters/orders the objects list.
View > Refresh Info. It refreshes the information present into the window.
Help > On usage. It opens the on-line manual.

(2) Each NE is seen by the supervisory system as an assembly of objects that represent one or more
physical parts of the NE itself. More detailed information concerning the objects that characterize
each single type of NE are reported into the relevant equipment manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 191


Into the table, one record is dedicated to each object. Such a record contains the following infor-
mation:
Equipment. Legacy equipment type that contains the object.
Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object.
Object name. Object name.
Slot. Topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter and eventually by
a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information.
Unit Code. Identification code assigned by the manufacturing company to the unit or to the
NE part to which corresponds the object.

The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects at the selec-
tion of the command.

(3) Into the status bar, the system points out the following information:
The number of the displayed records (xx records).
The activation of one or more filters.
The date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed the window.

To save/print the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command.


The Physical Unit Inventory window opens (Fig.28).

2. To print or save to a file:


The displayed records, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters
are not active, the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database.
A group of records, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected Items com-
mand.
The Output Device Selection window opens.

3. To print the data:

a. Select the Output To Printer option.


In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.

To save the data to a file:

a. Select the Output To File option.


b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To modify the identification code of the unit

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command.


The Physical Unit Inventory window opens (Fig.28).

2. Select the Action > Set Unit Code.


The Set Unit Code window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 192


3. Open the Equipment Type option menu and choose the type of the NE to which belongs the object.

4. Open the Object Type option menu and choose the object.

5. Into the Unit Code box, type the identification code of the object.
If after having changed the code, the user wants to reset the preceding one, it is sufficient to press
Default.

6. Press Ok.

To filter/order the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command.


The Physical Unit Inventory window opens (Fig.28).

2. Select the View > Set Filter command.


The Set Filter window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
Match Object Type. Object of a NE.
To set the criterion:
Select the NE type into the Equipment Type list.
Select the desired object into the Object type list.
It is possible to set a single object class at a time or all the classes at the same time
choosing the All Objects option.
Match Address. NE logic address
To set the criterion type the NE address into the text field and press Add. The system inserts
the value into the area placed under the Match Address box.
The user can delete from the list a single option pressing, after having selected such an option,
the Remove push-button or he can delete all the options at the same time pressing Remove
All.
It is possible to use the wild character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the text field:
12 the system will display, into the window, the NE with address12.
12* the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 12 (12, 120, etc.).
1*2 the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 1 and ends with 2
(12,102, 112, etc.).
Match Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the ob-
ject.
The setting mode of the filter is the same one described for the Match Address criterion.
Sort by. To order the records with respect to the parameters:
Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object.
Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the ob-
ject.
Object Name. Object name.
To set the ordering criterion, activate the desired option.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays in the Physical Unit Inventory window only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden
ones.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the command) and Help (it opens the
on-line manual) push-buttons.
When the Physical Unit Inventory window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 193


SNMP-SOFTWARE INVENTORY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry *, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The user with entry profile cannot switch the operating of the memory benches.

The SNMP-Software Inventory command displays the software version and the units list (where a con-
troller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment (except FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1) present into the
open map.
With details it is possible:
To verify the software version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map (pag.194)
To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment present
into the open map (pag.196)
To save/print the list of the equipment/units (pag.196)
To open the equipment window (pag.197)
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment (pag.197)
To update the equipment software (pag.197)
To switch the operating of the memory benches of an equipment controller (pag.197)
To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment (pag.198)
To filter/order the list of the equipment/units (pag.198)

To verify the software version of the SNMP equipment present into the open
map

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens.
2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.
The window displays the list of the NEs and the detail of the software (Fig.29).

Fig.29 Snmp NE Software Inventory window

Menu
bar (1)

The selected
push-button
points out the
type of data
displayed in
the table (2)

Equipment/
units list (3)

Status
bar (4)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 194


Fig.29 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the information.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment interface.
Action > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of an equipment.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Action > Software Download. It updates the equipment software.
Action > Read Data From NE. It sends a request for the updating of the information to the
controller of the selected NE.
Action > Bench Switch. It switches the operation of the memory benches of the controller of
the selected NE.
View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

(2) The lists (equipment and units) are not displayed contemporarily in the window. They are displayed
one instead of the other, according to the selected option. In detail, if active, the option
NE Software Inventory, the list of the NEs and the detail of the equipment software is dis-
played.
Unit Software Inventory, the list of the units is displayed.

The list points out all the SNMP equipment present in the open map except for FAMxc, ELFO and
SDH N+1.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

(3) If active, the NE Software Inventory option, for each equipment, displays in the column:
Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment.
Ip Addr. IP address of the equipment.
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B.
Release Bench 1. File name and version of the software present on the memory bench 1.
Bench 1 Status. Operating status of the memory bench 1:
Running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
Loaded. The software is present on the bench, but is not currently running (standby).
Not loaded. The software is not loaded in the memory bench.
Downloading. The updating of the software of the memory bench is running.
Release Bench 2. File name and version of the software present on the memory bench 2.
Bench 2 Status. Operating status of the memory bench 2. The detail of the wordings is the
same pointed out by the Bench 1 Status parameter.
If active, the Unit Software Inventory option displays in the column, for each unit:
Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment where the unit is present.
Type. Type of equipment where the unit is present.
Ip Address. IP address of the equipment where the unit is present.
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment, where the unit is present, and
NMS5UX-B.
Unit. Name of the unit.
Element. Name of the element, where the software is loaded, present in the unit: controller,
programmable logic, etc.
Actual Release. Name of the file and version of the software present in the element.

The information present in the table refers to the moment when the command is selected or the
refresh is executed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 195


(4) Field:
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not
active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.
View... Activation of one or more filters.
Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.

To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP
equipment present into the open map

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).

2. Select the Unit Software Inventory option.


The window displays the list of the units.

To save/print the list of the equipment/units

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).
2. Select the option:
NE Software Inventory, to display the list of the equipment.
Unit Software Inventory, to display the list of the units.
3. To print or save to a file:
All the records stored in the database, select the File > Print/Save > All items command.
The displayed records, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters
are not active, the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database.
A group of records, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected Items com-
mand.
The Output Device Selection window opens.

4. To print the data:

a. Select the Output To Printer option.


In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:

a. Select the Output To File option.


b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 196


To open the equipment window

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).

2. Press the NE Software Inventory option.

3. Select the equipment.


4. Select the Action > Open Equipment command.
The equipment interface opens.
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window at the same time.
It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed.
The description of the equipment window and of the messages that can be displaying at its opening are
reported in the specific equipment user manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the record of the equipment.

To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).

2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.


3. Select the equipment.

4. Select the Action > Equipment Info command.


The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.26).
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.

To update the equipment software

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).
2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.

3. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.
4. Select the Action > Software Download command.
The Software Download window opens (Fig.79).

To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller

The operation is not available for the Entry user.


It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the software is in progress and when
the software is not present in the bench.
The operation causes an automatic disconnection and reconnection of the NE. If the re-connection fails,
the NE assumes the unreachable status and the command of re-connection will be sent, at regular inter-
vals, by the supervision system.

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 197


2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.

3. Select the equipment.

4. Select the Action > Bench Switch command and confirm.


At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. If this one was successful, the bench
in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa.

To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).

2. Select the NE Software Inventory option.

3. Select the wished equipment in connected status.

4. Select the Action > Read Data From NE command.


At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

To filter/order the list of the equipment/units

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command.


The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).

2. Select the option:


NE Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the equipment.
Unit Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the unit.

3. Select the View > Set Filter command.


The View Filter window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the let-
ter:
p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status.
Match Bench Release. Version and/or usage status of the software present in the memory
benches of the equipment.
To set as criterion the version of the software, select the wished release from the list (the list
displays the releases of the software present in the equipment pointed out in the Snmp NE Sof-
tware Inventory window). The selected item is displayed in the text field.
To set as criterion the usage status of the software, activate the option:
Not Loaded, to display the NEs whose memory benches have not the software loaded.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 198


This option is not available if the software release is selected.
Loaded, to display the NEs whose version of software corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Loaded status (software present in the memory bench, but not used
at the moment).
Running, to display the NEs whose software version corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Running status (software present in the memory bench and used at
the moment).

The filter is available only when the NE Software Inventory option is active in the Snmp NE
Software Inventory window.
Match Object. Unit and/or element of the unit.
To set the criterion:
Select the unit in the Unit Type list.
It is possible to select only one unit or all the units selecting All Units.
Select the element (controller, programmable logic, etc.) in the Element Type list.
It is possible to set only one element or all the elements of the unit set in the Unit Type
box, selecting All Elements.

The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the Snmp NE Software
Inventory window is active.
Match Actual Release. Version of the software present in an element (controller, programmable
logic, etc.).
To set the criteria, select from the list the wished release (the list displays the releases of the
software present in the equipment pointed out in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window). The
selected item is displayed in the box.
The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the Snmp NE Software
Inventory window is active.

4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window only the records that satisfy the acti-
vated criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden
ones.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons.
When the Snmp NE Software Inventory window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automat-
ically removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 199


SNMP-EQUIPMENT PORT CONFIGURATION

System access Reading/Writing Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Reading Entry
Reading/Writing Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command displays the settings of the communication ports
of the SNMP equipment (except FAMxc and SDH N+1) present into the open map.
With details it is possible:
To verify the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment present into the open
map (pag.200)
To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of an equipment (pag.201)
To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment (pag.202)
To executes the Ping of an equipment (pag.202)
To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different (pag.202)
To modify the Logical Address of an equipment as its Station Id or vice versa (pag.202)
To filter/order the list of the equipment (pag.202)

To verify the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment


present into the open map

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command.


The Port Communication Browser window opens, where the list of the NEs and the detail of the com-
munication ports is displayed (Fig.30).

Fig.30 Port Communication Browser window

Menu
bar (1)

Equipment
list (2)

Fig.30 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Exit. It closes the window.
View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only. It displays only the equipment
whose equipment identifier (Station Id) is different from the Logical Address.
View > Show all equipment. It displays all the SNMP equipment (except from FAMxc and SDH
N+1) present in the open map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 200


Commands > NE PPP Interfaces. It displays the PPP communication ports of an equipment.
Commands > NE Routing Table. It displays/changes the routing table of an equipment.
Commands > Ping Check. It executes the Ping to check the presence and the reachability of
an equipment.
Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address). It changes the equipment identifier (Sta-
tion Id). The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment (Logical Ad-
dress).
Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id). It changes the logical address of an
equipment (Logical Address). The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Sta-
tion Id).
Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between NE and
NMS5UX-B.

(2) For each equipment, displays in the column:


Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment (NE object).
Address. IP address of the equipment (NE object).
Type. Equipment type.
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B.
Station Id. Equipment identifier set locally (SCT or WEB LCT - Equipment Id parameter).
OSI ip. IP address of the inner port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI router
(IP over OSI port).
OSI ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (IP over OSI port).
ip Address. IP address, of the communication port with the LAN network, of the equipment
(LAN port).
ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (LAN port).
Mac Address. Physical address of the equipment.
In band. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the supervision is
achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries). Value:
Disabled. The in band supervision is not active.
Enabled. The in band supervision is active.
---. The considered type of equipment does not support the supervision in band.
The columns OSI... are meaningful only if the equipment is managed with OSI protocol.
The information present in the table refers to the moment when the command is selected or the
refresh is executed.

The list points out all the SNMP equipment in connected or unreacheable status present in the
open map except for FAMxc and SDH N+1.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume only the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume only a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected


equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command.


The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30).
2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > NE PPP Interfaces command.


The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed (Fig.31).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 201


To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command.


The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > NE Routing Table command.


The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress currently used by the equipment is displayed (Fig.32).

To executes the Ping of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command.


The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30).
2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > Ping Check command.


The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and re-
ceived packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
Each Ping command sends the test packet three times.

To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command.


The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30).

2. Select the View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only command.
The window displays only the equipment whose value in the column Station Id is different from that
present in the column Logical Address.

To modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command.


The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30).
2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the:
Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address) command. The value present in the col-
umn Station Id is changed. The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment
(Logical Address).
Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id) command. The value present in the col-
umn Logical Address is changed. The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Station
Id).

To filter/order the list of the equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command.


The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 202


2. To ORDER the list, select the command:
Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between the NE
and the supervision system.
When the Port Communication Browser window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the
equipment is listed in alphabetical order according to the NE type.

3. To FILTER the list, select the View > Filter command.


The Filter Selection window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the let-
ter:
p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
Match Station Id. Local identifier of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the NE identifier in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the let-
ter:
p, the NE with identifier p will be displayed in the window.
p*, the NEs whose identifier start with p will be displayed.
p*o, the NEs whose identifier starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.

4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays in the Port Communication Browser window only the records that satisfy the acti-
vated criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden
ones.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons.
When the Port Communication Browser window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automat-
ically removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 203


SNMP-NE PPP INTERFACES

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE PPP Interfaces command displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports
available for an equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.

The command is available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment except for the ELFO,
SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus2 Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).

To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected


equipment

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment.


2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE PPP Interfaces command.
The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed (Fig.31).

Fig.31 PPP Interface Browser window

Menu
bar (1)

Equipment
info (2)

PPP
communication
ports (3)

Fig.31 notes
(1) Menu:
File > Exit. It closes the window.
(2) This area lists in order: NE logical address (NE type - NE IP address) - connection status of NE.
(3) The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. For the detail of all the
available ports for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
The window displays the more meaningful characteristics for each communication ports. In details,
the column:
Interface. PPP communication ports name.
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the port.
IP Netmask. Mask for the network address definition.
Mode. Functioning mode of the PPP protocol.
Speed. Transmission rate of the port.
Signal Input. Type of signal in input to the port (e.g. E1, STM-1, etc.).
2Mbit Selector, Slot Selector and 16Kbit Map. Respectively setting of the tributary 2Mb,
timeslot and 16Kbit (channel EOC E1).
The symbol - points out that the value is not meaningful for the considered type of port.

If the equipment is in disconnected status because it has been just created and the first connec-
tion has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is
not present in the database of the supervision system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 204


SNMP-NE ROUTING TABLE

System access Reading/Writing Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Reading Entry
Reading/Writing Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Routing Table command displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress currently used by an equipment (Routing Table Running and Default Gateway).
With details it is possible:
To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment (pag.205)
To add an element to the Routing Table (pag.206)
To delete an element from the Routing Table (pag.207)
To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.207)
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.207)

The command is available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment except for the ELFO,
SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).

For more information about the Routing Table and Default Gateway go to pag.207.

To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment.


2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command.
The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress currently used by the equipment is displayed (Fig.32).

Fig.32 Routing Table window

Menu Supervision port


bar (1) of the local equipment
which the Gateway
Equipment equipment is connected
info (2) to (3)

Modality of
Elements of the connection
routing table (direct or indirect)
between the specific port
IP address of (Interface) and the
the destination destination IP network (4)
IP network
or element IP address
of the equipment which
IP NetMask of acts as Gateway
the destination
IP network
Supervision port
or element
of the local equipment
IP address which the equipment
of the equipment acting as Default Gateway
which acts as is connected to (3)
Gateway

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 205


Fig.32 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Exit. It closes the window.
Commands > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
Commands > Add New Route. It adds an element to the Routing Table.
Commands > Delete Route. It deletes an element from the Routing Table.

(2) This area points out in order: Logical address of the NE (Type of NE-IP Address of NE) - connection
status of NE.

If the equipment is in disconnected status because it has been just created and the first connec-
tion has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is
not present in the database of the supervision system.

(3) The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. Here below are reported
the ports generally present in all the equipment. For the detail of all the ports available for each
type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
Wording:
Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program
or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
RS232. Serial port for the connection with other network elements.
Radio. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
2Mb/s. E1 communication port (2Mb/s).
- . Inner port (internal loopback).

(4) Wording:
Direct. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The
IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
Indirect. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable by the equipment inter-
face. The IP network or the element have been automatically inserted by the OSPF protocol
(dynamic element).

To add an element to the Routing Table

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment.

2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command.


The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32).

3. Select the Commands > Add New Route command.


The Add Route window opens.

4. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between
0 and 255.

5. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between
0 and 255.

6. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between
0 and 255.

7. Press Add.
The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 206


To delete an element from the Routing Table

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment.

2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command.


The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32).

3. Select the element(s) of the Routing Table.


Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Direct protocol) cannot be deleted.

4. Select the Commands > Delete Route command and confirm.


The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into
the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment.

2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command.


The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32).
3. Into the Default Gateway area, type, into each one of the four available spaces, a number comprised
between 0 and 255.
The supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment is automatically pointed out be-
tween brackets.

4. Press Apply and confirm.


The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.

To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment.

2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command.


The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32).

3. In the Default Gateway area, press Delete and confirm.


The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)

When all the equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing Table
and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner traffic.
The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belong to different networks, then, the
traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.

Routing Table

The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged
among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other
one.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 207


Routing Table (Running)

Each equipment at its initialization (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the Routing Ta-
ble that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment
for the input/output of the supervisory signal).

These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.

If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into
the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements
of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.

If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones.

The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Rout-
ing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system
does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they
are newly set at every equipment start-up.

The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the elements present
into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.

Stored Routing Table

The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the
equipment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into
the Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the el-
ements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an ad-
dress of the equipment supervisory ports. In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At
the next equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.

The Stored Routing Table can be displayed/modified through the local management program of the equip-
ment (SCT/LMT and/or WEB LCT).

Default Gateway

The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver
unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 208


SNMP-HW INVENTORY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-HW Inventory command displays the hardware version of the SNMP equipment present into
the open map (Hw Inventory functionality).
With details it is possible:
To display the hardware of the SNMP equipment present in the open map (pag.209)
To save the data to file (pag.211)
To save periodically the data to file (pag.212)
To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file (pag.212)

The Hw Inventory functionality is optional and available only for the SNMP equipment of type EL, US,
ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).

To display the hardware of the SNMP equipment present in the open map

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command.


The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33).

2. Select, in the Equipment Type area, the NE types for which you wish to display the hardware data.
3. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of records you wish to display.

4. Press Read.
The window displays the hardware data relevant to all the types of NE selected present in the open map.

5. If you wish to display a specific detail of the data, execute one or more of the following settings, ac-
cording to the filter criteria you wish to use:
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the logical address of the NE in the text field and press Add.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
It is possible to delete an item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, Del.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
be before a numeric field). For example, the values 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed, whi-
le the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment.

The filter is available and meaningful only if the Expansion display modality is selected.
To set the criterion, select the wished units. It is possible to select a maximum of three units.
To select the units, press the Ctrl key and the unit.
Moreover it is possible to define, for each type of equipment, which units must not be used in
the Unit Type in the following way:
Press Not managed unit type.
The FilterUnitType window opens.
In the Select equipment type area, select the type of equipment for which you wish to
hide the units.
In the area below, the detail of the relevant units is displayed.
The highlighted units are already hidden.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 209


In the Select not managed unit area, select the units you do not want to display in the
Unit Type list for the selected equipment type.
Select the Select All option to select all the units or the Deselect All option to deselect all
the units.
Press Apply.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 10 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.
HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 3 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.
Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 24 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.

6. Press Read.
The hardware data relevant to all the NEs, present in the open map, satisfying the set criteria are dis-
played.
7 Select the option:
Expansion to display the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of all the units are displayed.
Compact to display the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware characteris-
tics of the controller unit are displayed.

8. To delete all the set option filter, press Reset Filter.

Fig.33 Hw Inventory page

Filter criteria of Data display List of Toolbar


hardware data (1) modality (2) hardware data (3) (4)

Select the arrow to sort the list (5)

Fig.33 notes

(1) In detail, the available filters are:


Equipment Type. Type of equipment.
The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the hardware data. The setting of all the
other data is optional.
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 210


IP Address. IP address of the NE.
Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment.
The filter is available only if selected the Expansion display modality.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.

(2) The option:


Expansion, displays the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware char-
acteristics of all the units are displayed.
Compact, displays the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of the controller unit are displayed.
To switch from a display modality to the other, select the relevant option.
In case of compact display, it is also possible to switch to the expansion modality pressing the Exp
push-button next to each row of the table. In this case, the table will display only the hardware data
relevant to the expanded equipment (the IP address field is automatically set, as filter, the IP ad-
dress of the expanded equipment).

The Max Rows box points out the maximum number of displayed records.
The x of y Rows field points out the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number of
total records (y) which satisfy the set filter criteria.

To display all the records that satisfy the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total number of
records in the Max Rows box.

(3) The displayed hardware parameters are:


Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
Description. Description of the equipment.
Hw Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
Part Num. Part Number of the unit.
Serial Num. Serial number of the unit.
Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.

(4) Push-button:
Read. It reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5UX-B system and display them
according to the set filter.
Reset Filter. It deletes the filter setting.
Export timer. It periodically saves the displayed data to file.
Export manual. It saves the displayed data to file.

(5) Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.


Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is
re-sorted in decreasing order and so on.

To save the data to file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command.


The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33).
2. Filter the data you wish to save to file (see pag.209).

3. Press Export manual.


The Export window opens, where an hypertextual link is present with the name/extension of the file
where the data will be saved.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 211


By default, the name of the file has the following format HwInv <day-month-year> <hour-minute-sec-
ond>.zip. The name and the extension of the file can be configured by the Superuser. The formats of
the managed files are: csv, xml, zip (cvs zipped or xml zip).

4 Select the hypertextual link.

5. Set the path where you wish to save the file.

6. Confirm the operation.


The system saves in the file all the hardware data which satisfy the set filter criterion and not only those
relevant to the displayed records.

To save periodically the data to file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command.


The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33).

2. Filter the data you wish to periodically save to file (pag.209).

3. Press Export timer.


The ExpTimer window opens.
In the Filter description area, the filter criteria are displayed which will be applied to each periodic sav-
ing.

4. Type the name of the filter into the Filter Name box.

5. Type, in the Export periodicity day box, the periodicity in days of the data export and, in the Hour box,
the time when the export is executed.

6 Press Insert.
At the first set time interval, a file will be saved containing the hardware data of the equipment that
satisfy the criteria present in the filter.
The file will be saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/ExpHwInv, in the format .cvs and .xml, and will ba
named HwInv-filtername-<date_time>.
The files will be saved until when the user does not remove the filter (pag.212).

To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command.


The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33).
2. Press Export timer.
The ExpTimer window opens.
The Delete Filter area lists the filters defined by the user.

3. Select the filter you wish to deactivate.


The Select filter to be deleted area points out the detail of the filter.

4 Press Delete.
The filter is removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 212


SNMP-NE BACKUP/RESTORE

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command displays the backup files of the SNMP equipment present into
the open map.
With details it is possible:
To display the backup files of the SNMP equipment present in the open map (pag.213)
To transfer the configuration present in a backup file to an equipment (configuration restore)
(pag.216)
To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) (pag.216)
To lock/unlock a backup file (pag.216)

The equipment list for which the NE Backup/Restore functionality is configurable. Default: EL, US, ADM-
1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).

The supervision system periodically saves to disk the configuration of the equipment (backup files). For
more information about the backup and restore modalities go to pag.217.

To display the backup files of the SNMP equipment present in the open map

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command.


The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser.

2. If you wish to display a specific detail of the files, execute one or more of the following basic settings,
according to the filter criteria you wish to use:
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
It is possible to set the logical addresses in one of the following ways:
Type the logical address of the NE into the text field and press Add.
Press Tree. A window opens, where are displayed the containers and the equipment
present in the map. Select the wished equipment. The equipment is pointed out in the
text field. Press Add.
The Tree push-button is only available in the page open with the Microsoft Internet Ex-
plorer browser.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
To delete a record from the list, select the address and press Del.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
In order to set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
precede a field with numbers). For example, the value 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed,
while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
File lock. Status of the file. Selecting the option:
All, the list will display all the backup files.
Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:
Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
The backup file must not contain errors.
To set the criterion select the wished option.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 213


3. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of files you wish to display.

4. Press Apply Filter.


The window displays the backup files of the NEs, present in the open map, which satisfy the set criteria
(Fig.34).

5. Press the Info push-button, relevant to a backup file to display its detail.
The File Property window opens with the following information:
Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
File Name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following: <Equip-
ment ID> <hours minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
File Date. Date/time of saving of the backup file.
Backup Result. Result of the operation of file saving.
Restore Date. Date/time when the operation of file restore has been executed.
Restore Result. Result of the operation of file restore.
The presence of the symbol - signals that the information is not available.
For the Backup Result and Restore Result the background color:
Green, points out that the operation was successful.
Red, points out that the operation is failed.

Fig.34 NE Backup/Restore page

Filter criteria for File display List of the Push-buttons


the backup files (1) modality (2) backup file (3) bar (4)

Select the arrow to sort the list (5)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 214


Fig.34 notes

(1) In detail, the available filters are:


Equipment Type. Type of equipment.
The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the backup file. The setting of all the other
filters is optional.
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
File lock. Status of file. If active the option:
All, the list will display all the backup files.
Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:
Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
The backup file must not contain errors.

(2) The Max Rows box points out the maximum number of displayed files.
The x of y Rows field points out the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number of
total records (y) which satisfy the set filter criteria.

In order to display all the records satisfying the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total
number of records into the Max Rows box.

(3) Each record identifies a backup file. For each file, is pointed out in the column:
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
Backup Date. Date/time of creation of the backup file.
Lock. Status of the file: Locked, <empty box> (unlocked).
Backup file name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following:
<Equipment ID> <hour minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
Operations available. Push-button:
Info. It displays the characteristics of the file. If the color of the box backgrounds:
Green, there are not errors in the backup file.
Red, there are errors in the backup file.
Restore. It transfers the configuration stored in the file to the relevant equipment
present in the map.
Backup. It saves the current equipment configuration to file.
Lock/Unlock. It locks/unlocks the file. The push-buttons are displayed one in alter-
native to the other, depending on the status of the file.
When a push-button is disabled, it means that the relevant function is not available.

(4) Push-button:
Apply Filter. It reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5UX-B system and displays
them according to the set filters.
Switch to Equipment. It displays all the equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore
functionality, present in the map. The records with the available Backup push-button cor-
respond to the equipment in connected status, whose configuration can be saved.
Switch to Backup File. It displays the backup files of the equipment, managed by the NE
Backup/Restore functionality, present in the map.
Reload. It re-reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5UX-B system.
Lock All. It locks all file present in the list.
The Switch to Equipment and Switch to Backup File push-buttons are displayed one in alter-
native to the other.

(5) Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.


Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is
re-sorted in decreasing order and so on.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 215


To transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment
(configuration restore)

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command.


The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser (Fig.34).

2. Display the backup file you wish to transfer to the equipment (pag.213).

3. Press the relevant Restore push-button.


The NE Restore window opens with the following information:
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
File Name. Name of the backup file.

4. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.

To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup)

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command.


The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser (Fig.34).

2. Continue in one of the following ways:

a. Display the backup file/files of the equipment whose configuration you wish to save (pag.213).
b. Press Backup near the file/files.
Or:

a. Press Switch to Equipment.


All the equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore functionality and present in the map,
are displayed.
The records with the available Backup push-button correspond to the equipment in connected
status, whose configuration can be saved.
b. Press the Backup push-button relevant to the equipment whose configuration you wish to save.
The NE Backup window opens with the following information:
Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
3. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.

To lock/unlock a backup file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command.


The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser (Fig.34).

2. Display the backup file you wish to transfer to the equipment (pag.213).

3. To LOCK the file, press the relevant Lock push-button.


The file is locked (label Locked - column Lock).
It is possible to lock all the files present in the NE Backup/Restore page pressing Lock All.

To UNLOCK a file, press the relevant Unlock push-button.


The file is unlocked (column Lock empty).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 216


NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)

The NE Backup/Restore functionality allows saving to file the complete configuration of an equipment
(Backup operation), displaying the list of the available backup files and transferring the configuration
stored in a file to the relevant equipment (Restore operation).

The list of equipment for which the NE Backup/Restore function is configurable. Default: equipment of
type EL, US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2,
ALCplus2).

Backup operation

The saving of the backup files is automatically executed by the supervision system or it can be forced in
any moment (pag.216).
The saving modalities by the supervision system are the following: NMS5UX-B periodically verifies if, for
each equipment, one of the following conditions has occurred:
No backup file is available.
A change (set) has been executed to the equipment configuration.
A connection in Configuration modality has been activated between LCT and the equipment.
The connection between the supervision system and the equipment has been activated or re-
activated.
A new operation has been stored in the Command Log stored in the equipment controller.

For each equipment, which at least one of the above mentioned conditions has occurred for, the system
saves the complete configuration into a file. At the successive check, if at least one of the above mentioned
conditions has occurred again, the complete configuration of the equipment will be saved into a different
file and so on.
With complete configuration of an equipment we mean:
Configuration of the equipment.
Configuration of the communication port (IP Ethernet, PPP RS-232, etc.) of the routing tables
and of the possible OSPF parameters.
List of remote equipment (Remote Element Table).
The periodicity of the control by NMS5UX-B can be configured by the Superuser.

A maximum of N files (N configurable - default=3) for each equipment is saved on the disk of the machine
where the supervision system is installed. The file successive to the maximum number will overwrite the
oldest backup file.
It is possible to lock one or more files in such a way that the system does not overwrite them (pag.216).
These files will not enter in the count of the maximum number of files saved for each managed equipment.
This means they will not be overwritten until the user unlocks them.
For example, suppose that the system saves a maximum of 3 files for each equipment. For the equipment
A, the files A1, A2 and A3 are automatically saved in this order. If the oldest file (A1) is locked, when the
fourth file is generated, this will not overwrite the file A1, but a new file (A4) will be created. If no other
file is locked, when a new file (A5) is generated, this will overwrite the oldest file (A2). In this way, the
locked files + the last three saved files will be always available to the user.
It is possible to lock as many files as you wish. The files will remain locked until the user unlocks them.

Two files with the same content will be available for each backup file in the system disk, one for each for-
matting compatible with the O.S.:
UNIX. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the following
format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_U.bku.
WINDOWS. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the
following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_W.bku.
This file is compatible with the applications SCT, WEB LCT, SCT BKU Builder and is available on
the disk of the machine where ones supervision system is installed.

By means of the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application, it is possible to copy a backup file to a different
machine or external disk by means of a proper push-button present in the NE Backup/Restore page.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 217


Restore operation

The Restore operation (pag.216), transfers to the equipment ONLY the configuration parameters present
in the backup file.
The restore of the communication parameters (IP Address, routing tables, etc.) can be executed only
through the SCT o WEB LCT application. The restore of the Remote Element Table can be configured
through the SNMP-Remote Element Table command (pag.390) or through the SCT/WEB LCT applica-
tion.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 218


LEGACY-ALARM AVERAGE

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Alarm Average command displays the mean of the alarms per second received by the
NMS5UX-B and sent by the Legacy equipment.

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been
installed.

To display the mean of the alarms per second received by the NMS5UX-B sys-
tem and sent by the Legacy equipment

1. Select the Configuration > LegacyAlarm Average command.


The shAverage window opens where the mean of the alarms received by NMS5UX-B and sent by the
Legacy equipment is displayed as pointed out (Fig.35).
The information present into the window refer to the average value of the alarms at the window opening
time.
To update the data, press Refresh. At the choice of the push-button, the system will update the date/
time and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.

Fig.35 shAverage window

Average value of alarms


for second received
during the LAST HOUR

Average value of alarms


for second received
during the CURRENT HOUR

Average value of alarms


for second received
during the LAST MINUTE

Date/time relevant to the


window opening or to
the window updating

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 219


LOCATE

The Locate menu contains the following commands:

Equipment List Locate (pag.221). It displays the list of the equipment managed by the
NMS5UX-B system.
Proxy Equipment List (pag.239). It displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy
Agent and their Proxy address.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 220


EQUIPMENT LIST LOCATE

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced *, Privileged *, Superuser *

* Only the Superuser can verify in which maps is present the symbol of an equipment and can reset and
rewrites the equipment table.
The Command Executor application can be started only by the Superuser or by the user with privileged or
advanced profile.
The recording data of the conformity certificate of a radio equipment, if modified, can be saved only by the
Superuser and by the users with privileged and advanced profiles.

The Equipment List Locate command displays the list of the equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B.
With details it is possible:

To display the list of the equipment (pag.222)


To save/print the list of the equipment (pag.224)
To filter/sort the list of equipment (pag.225)

To open the equipment window (pag.226)


To verify the configuration/operation status of an equipment (pag.226)
To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect Up-
load of an equipment (pag.226)
To verify in which maps the symbol of an equipment is present (pag.227)
To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment (pag.227)
To delete and rewrite the equipment table (pag.227)

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment (pag.228)


To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type
(pag.229)
To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time (pag.230)

To update the equipment software (SNMP) (pag.230)


To update the equipment software (FAMxc) (pag.231)

To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equip-
ment (pag.232)

To verify/modify the LCT user list of an equipment (pag.233)


To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment (pag.233)

To display/modify the certificate of conformity of a radio equipment (pag.233)

To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test) (pag.234)


To connect one or more equipment (pag.234)
To disconnect one or more equipment (pag.235)
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment (pag.235)
To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment (pag.236)
To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type (pag.236)
To reset and connect one or more equipment (pag.237)
To connect one or more CommServer-S (pag.237)
To disconnect one or more CommServer-S (pag.238)

To start the Command Executor application (pag.238)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 221


To display the list of the equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, where the list of the equipment is displayed
(Fig.36).

If the profile of the user who has selected the command is:
Superuser, the information is referred to the equipment present in ALL the map managed by
NMS5UX-B.
Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged, the information is referred ONLY to the equipment
present in the open map.
At the opening of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, it is possible that a warning window
opens, where it is pointed out that the database contains a number of equipment higher than N.
For this cause, the user is asked if he wishes that the information about the active measures of PM is
made available (operation that can take a lot of time). To press the push-button:
Yes, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens and, for each NE in the list, it will be
possible to verify the activation status of the PM measures (Perf. column).
No, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, but the information relevant to the ac-
tive measures of PM will be not available.
The N limit is, by default, 100. The value can be modified by the Superuser.

Fig.36 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window

Menu
bar (1)

List of
equipment
(2)

Status
bar (3)

Fig.36 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the information.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Actions > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment window.
Actions > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of an equipment.
Actions > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Actions > Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of an NE.
Actions > Export Performance Monitoring. It saves on file the results of the PM measures.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 222


Actions > View/Modify PM Status. It activates/deactivates one or more PM measures at the
same time.
Actions > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software (SNMP).
Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software (FAMxc).
Actions > SNMP-Equipment Severity Code. It displays/changes the status/severity of the
alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equipment.
Actions> LCT Equipment User. It displays/changes the LCT user list of an equipment.
Actions > Location. It adds/removes a prefix to the logic address of the equipment.
Actions > Map Structure Rebuild. It deletes and rewrites the table where the information rel-
evant to the equipment present in the map is present (equipment table).
Actions > Radio Certificate. It displays the certificate of conformity of a radio.
Commands > Line Test. It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
Commands > Connect. It activates the connection between NMS5UX-B and the equipment.
Commands > Disconnect. It deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and the NE.
Commands > Alarm re-alignment. It forces the acquisition of the equipment alarms.
Commands > Configuration Upload. It forces the acquisition of the equipment configuration
Commands > SNMP-Configuration Download. It transfer the configuration of an equipment
to another NE of the same type.
Commands > Legacy-Reset&Connect. It resets the information, stored into the database of
the NMS5UX-B system, relevant to the configuration of the NE and then activating the con-
nection between the system and the NEs themselves.
Commands > Communication Server Board. It activates/deactivates the connection between
the NMS5UX-B and the CommServer-S equipment (CS objects).
Commands > SNMP-Command Executor. It executes series of SNMP commands stored to file.
View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
View > Acknowledge Status. It displays the marking status (acknowledge) of the alarms
(current and/or alarm history), of the presence of LCT in Configuration modality and of the
not correctly executed Configuration Upload operation.
View > Equipment Location (Map). It lists the maps where the symbol of the selected NE is
present.
View > SNMP-LCT Logged Users. It displays the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an NE.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

(2) For each equipment, the following columns report:


Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment.
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B.
Alarm. Functional status (alarms) of the equipment.
The severity level of the alarm present in the equipment opens. When more alarms of dif-
ferent severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm is displayed.
Alr Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms and of the sending of the equipment traps to the
supervision system. Symbol:
X. At least an alarm or the sending of an equipment trap is disabled.
To verify the disabled alarms and the disabled sending of traps, open the Equipment
Severity Code window (Fig.67).
-. The equipment has not alarms or sending of traps disabled.
Lct Presence. Status of the connection between the LCT program and the equipment:
ABSENT. The LCT user is not currently connected to the equipment.
CONFIGURING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modal-
ity.
MONITORING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
Lct Config. Enabling status of the LCT for the possible connection to the equipment:
Enabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment both in Monitor-
ing and in Configuration modality.
Disabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment only in Monitor-
ing modality.
Perf. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures. Symbol:
X. At least one measure of PM is active.
-. No measure of PM is active.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 223


. . . Information is not available. In the warning window, displayed at the opening of
the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been selected.
Ack. Marking status (acknowledge) of the following signalling:
Alarm (current and/or in the alarm history).
Presence of LCT in Configuration modality.
Operation of Configuration Upload not correctly executed.
Symbol:
X. At least one not marked signalling is present.
-. Not marked signallings are not present.
IP/Ph Address. Physical address of the equipment.
The wording VIRTUAL EQ. points out that the record refers to a virtual NE.
Board Addr. IP Address of the CS/IPBOX that is physically connected with the NE.
This information is available and significant only for the Legacy equipment.
Port Nb. Number of the CS/IPBOX port that is physically connected with the NE.
This information is available and significant only for the Legacy equipment.

The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window has been opened or updated.
The presence of the - symbol points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for
the status and/or the type of equipment, which is referred to.

(3) Field:
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is
active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
View... Activation of one or more filters.
Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.

To save/print the list of equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. To print or save to a file:


All the equipment stored in the database, select the File > Print/Save > All Items command.
The displayed equipment, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the fil-
ters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
A group of equipment, select the record and, then, the File > Print/Save > Selected Items
command.
The Output Device Selection window opens.

3. To print the data:

a. Select the Output To Printer option.


In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:
a. Select the Output To File option.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 224


To filter/sort the list of the equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the View > Set Filter command.


The View Filter window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the following options:
Match Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character. For example, typing in the box the letter:
p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
Match IP/Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and address of equipment.
To set as criterion the equipment:
Real managed with SNMP protocol, activate the SNMP Equipment option, and type the IP
address of the wished NE in the text fields.
Virtual, activate the Virtual Equipment option.
Real managed with Legacy protocol, activate the Legacy Equipment option, and type the
physical address of the wished NE in the text field.
Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status.
Match equipment type. Equipment type.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
Match performance. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures.
To set the criterion, select the option:
Enabled, the NEs with at least one PM measure will be displayed.
Disabled, the NEs with no active PM measures will be displayed.

The box is not available if in the warning window, displayed at the opening of the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been pressed.
Match Alarm. Severity level of the alarms of the NE.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished severity.
Match Alarm Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms/trap sending of the equipment to NMS5UX-B.
To set the criterion, select the option:
Enabled, the NEs that have not alarms or enabled trap sending will be displayed.
Disabled, the NEs that have at least one alarm or one disabled trap sending will be dis-
played.
Match Gosip Address. Parameters that compose the NSAP (Gosip) address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, select the:
Domain box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2 bytes,
(Domain parameter - default part of the NSAP Address).
Area box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2 bytes (Area
parameter - default part of the NSAP Address).
System ID box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 6 bytes
(System ID parameter).
Match location. Physical position of the equipment.

This criterion is significant only for Legacy equipment.


To set the criterion, select the option:
Board and select the IP Address of the CommServer-S or IPBOX which the NE is physi-
cally connected to.
Port and select the number of the serial port which the NE is physically connected to.
Sort by. Sorts the records.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 225


To set the criterion, select the option:
Logical Address, the equipment will be listed in alphabetical order, with respect to the
logic address.
Type, the equipment will be listed according to the type of equipment.
To expand/compress a filter criterion without affecting its activation/deactivation status, use the up/
down arrows on the right side.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window only the records that satisfy the
activated criteria.
Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the
on-line manual) push-buttons.
When the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window closes, the possible activation of filters is automat-
ically deleted.

To open the equipment window

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window contemporarily.

3. Select the Actions > Open Equipment command.


The equipment window opens.
It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed. The description of the
equipment window and of the message that can be displayed at its opening is described in the specific
equipment User Manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the equipment record.

To verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Equipment Information window at the same
time.

3. Select the Actions > Equipment Info command.


The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.26).

To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence
and Incorrect Upload of an equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).
2. Select the wished equipment, with marked signalling (symbol x in the column Ack - see Fig.36).

3. Select the View > Acknowledge Status command.


The Information window opens (Fig.23).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 226


To verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present

Operation available only for the Superuser.

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the View > Equipment Location (Map) command.


The Equipment Location window opens.
Box/column:
Type. Type of NE.
Ip/Ph Address. IP or physical address of the NE.
Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
Map name. Maps where the equipment is present.

To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. To add a prefix:

a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to add the same prefix.
b. Select the Actions > Location > Assign command.
The Location window opens.
c. Type, in the New Location Name box, the prefix you wish to add to the logical address of the
equipment (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum 10 characters).
d. Press Apply.
In the Logical Addr column of the selected equipment, the prefix is added (prefix - logic ad-
dress).
The prefix is furthermore added in all the windows where the <logic address> field is present.
The only exception is the label of the icon that represents the equipment in the map, where the
prefix is not pointed out.
If the equipment was already provided with prefix, the new value replaces the previous one.
3. To remove a prefix:

a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to remove the prefix to.
b. Select the Actions > Location > Remove command.
The prefix is removed from the logic address of the equipment.

To delete and rewrite the equipment table

Operation available only for the Superuser.

The command must be used only in case of a supposed misalignment between the information
present in the equipment table and the equipment represented on video in the maps.

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the Actions > Map Structure Rebuild command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 227


To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment

Operation not available for virtual NE objects and virtual NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node
type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - pag.48/pag.49).

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).
2. Select the equipment.
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Graphic Performance Manager window at the
same time.
3. Select the Actions > Performance Monitoring command.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to
verify the results of the PM measures is required.
In the boxes:
Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is
set).
Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the duration of the
period (by default, 30 days is set) is displayed.

4. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Per-
formance Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically
removed.

5. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:


Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of
the selected item (see step 7).
Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.

6. Press OK.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.
7. Select the TPC menu.
All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(points where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording)
available for the selected equipment are selected.
The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.
Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.
8. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.

All the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters
Fig.24 shows an example.
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange, it becomes
red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in anyone of the other TPs.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 228


To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of
the same type

Operation not available for the virtual NE objects.


It is possible to select a maximum of 100 equipment.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the node
equipment.

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to save on file the PM measures of all the
selected NEs at the same.

3. Select the Actions > Export Performance Monitoring command.


Under the window title, it is pointed out the NE type.
4. Position the pointer into the TPclass area and press the right mouse button.
The system displays the list of the measurements foreseen for the selected type of NE.

5. Choose one measurement type from the list.


Into the Termination Point (TP) area, the system points out the relevant measuring points.

6. Choose one or more measuring points for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved
on file. It is possible to select more records.

7. Select the option:


Daily, to save on file the daily records relevant to the selected measuring point/s.
Primary, to save on file the primary records.
8. Set the date (into the Date boxes) and the time (into the Time boxes) respectively for the starting (Start
Date Time box) and for the ending (Stop Date Time box) of the time for which the results of the PM
measurements have to be saved.
The supervisory system has at disposal the results of the PM measurements relevant to the last 180
days (6 months).

9. Type the directory and the file name, for which the operator wants to save the data, into the File Name
box.
The system provides a default directory and name composed by specific information, such as, for in-
stance, the date, the time, the NE logic address.
The format of the provided default name can be changed by the Superuser.

10.ONLY if the user wants to forward the file to another user, it is necessary to set the name of the user
into the Remote Address box.
If the user positions the pointer on the text field and press the right mouse button, the system displays
a pre-defined list of users. Select the desired user.
In this case, the file will be as saved into the pre-defined directory as forwarded to the set user.
The predefined list of users has to be set and later it can be changed by the Superuser.
To be able to forward the file, the system administrator has to configure properly the mail server.

11.Press OK.
The system displays the Preview window that points out the resuming of the executed setting opera-
tions.
Then, in the lower part of the window, the system points out the total number of records (Total Record
Number box) and the number of records that contain errored data (Records with counters box).

The system can display an error message that points out that the number of record present into the
set time is too high. This situation is caused because the system stores into each file a maximum limit
N of records. The limit N can be changed by the Superuser.
The data are saved in ASCII format that can be recognized by a great number of text processing pro-
grams and databases.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 229


To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time

Operation not available for the virtual NE objects.


For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the node
equipment.

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.


Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to activate/deactivate the PM measures
of all the selected NEs at the same.

3. Select the Actions > View/Modify PM Status command.


The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens, where the status of the measure points is displayed
(Fig.25).

4. To activate:
All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action >
Start > All command.
The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area select the
Action > Start > Filtered command.
The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Start > Selected command.
To deactivate:
All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action >
Stop > All command.
The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Stop > Filtered command.
The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the
Action > Stop > Selected command.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

To update the equipment software (SNMP)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the SNMP equipment, except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the equip-
ment at the same type.

3. Select the Actions > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download command.


The Software Download window opens (Fig.79).

4. In the Selection file DWL box, set the file you wish to use for the updating.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the Select file for download
window opens) and select the file among the available ones.
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/ftp directory, it is necessary to copy
it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download opera-
tion, to find the file for the updating in the home/ftp directory.
To press Read to display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file.

5. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option:
Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller.
Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or oper-
ating code).

6. Activate the Bench switch? box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switching of the memory
bench is automatically executed in order to use the bench with the updated software.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 230


7. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the updating is:
Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box.

It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected.


Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time
for Download area.

8. Press Start Dwl.


If in the previous step, it has been:
Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic ad-
dress and the type of NE which is updating the software, and the status of the operation (Wait-
ing, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed.
The operation takes some minutes.

Before starting the updating of the controller of the NE, it executes a compatibility check be-
tween the software that must be sent and the one present in the controller itself.
The check consists in verifying the technology and the type of NE (pointed out by the first 2 char-
acters of the file name). For some types of NEs, checks are executed also on the 3rd character
of the filename. More information is reported in the equipment user manual relevant to the spe-
cific type of NE.
If the parameters are compatible, the download starts. Otherwise, the updating of the software
will not be executed.
If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window (Fig.82), in the Release box relevant
to the updated memory bench, the new version of the software is pointed out.
If it is not successful, the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench displays the old
version or the wording not loaded.
Set a date/time of execution for the updating of the software, the Software Download window
is closed.
In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present
in the Equipment list for download area.

To update the equipment software (FAMxc)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the wished FAMxc.

Selecting two or more records of the FAMxc type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the
NEs at the same type.

3. Select the Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command.


The Insert window opens (Fig.83).

4. In the File Selection box, set the file you wish to use for the updating.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window
opens) and select the file among the available ones.

If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to
copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download
operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/tftpdir directory.

5. Set the date/time when you wish to schedule the operation in the Date/Time Scheduled for Download
box.
6. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switch of the
memory bench and a restart of the equipment are executed.

The setting is valid for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If you wish to execute
a different setting for an equipment of the list:

a. Select the equipment.


b. Select the Action > Bench Info command.
The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.85).
c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box as you wish.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 231


d. Press Ok
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.

7. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box.
If the Superuser has defined the equipment password in the configuration file of the system, it is not
necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password Default
box.

The set password is valid for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If an equipment
has a different password, it is necessary to set in the following way:

a. Select the equipment.


b. Select the Action > Bench Info command.
The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.85).
c. Type the equipment access code in the Password box.
d. Press Ok
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
8. Press OK.
The Software Download window is closed.
In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the
Equipment List.

To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap
sending of an equipment

Operation available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except
for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).
2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Actions > SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command.


The Equipment Severity Code window opens pointing out the list of the alarms relevant to the selected
equipment.
For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the transmission status of the relevant trap from the NE
to the NMS5UX-B system and the local severity level of the alarm are displayed (Fig.67).

In the list are not present the alarms of the user inputs, which have a different management of the
severity (see pag.124).

4. To modify the characteristics of an alarms double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and then
the Action > View/Modify Severity command.
The View/Modify Severity Code window opens, where it is pointed out in the box/area:
Alarm Description. Name of the alarm.
Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option:
Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled.
Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled.
Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm.
The label (NMS5UX-B default) points out the default setting associated to that alarm by the su-
pervision system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 232


5. To modify the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, select the push-button
relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area.

If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area) the severity level associated to the alarm can-
not be modified.

6. Press Modify.
The possible modification of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is pointed out in the Equipment
Severity Code window.

To verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment

Operation available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except
for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Actions > SNMP-LCT Equipment Users command.


The LCT User Manager window opens (Fig.72).

4. The procedures to modify the list of the LCT users are the same pointed out at par.
To add a new LCT user (pag.386)
To modify the characteristics of the LCT users (pag.387)
To delete a LCT user (pag.387)

To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment

Operation available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except
for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the View > SNMP-LCT Logged Users command.


The Logged Users window opens, where the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE
when the command is selected is displayed (Fig.73).

To display/modify the certificate of conformity of a radio equipment

The recording data, if modified, can be saved only by the Superuser and by the users with privileged
and advanced profiles.

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the radio equipment.

3. Select the Actions > Radio Certificate command.


The EqpInfoPage window opens where all the characteristics of the radio (conformity certificate) are
displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 233


4. To enter a value or modify the existing one, select the relevant box and type the new value.

5. Press Save.
The certificate is saved in the database of the system.

To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).
2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > Line Test command.


The LINE TEST command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
4. Press Execute.
Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To connect one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > Connect command.


The CONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status.
Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms
present on the NE.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 234


During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To disconnect one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > Disconnect command.


The DISCONNECT command window opens.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address field, logic address.
Type field, type of NE.
Status field, result of the operation:
OK, the operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour, it becomes brown.
FAILED! ...., the operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.


3. Select the Commands > Alarm Re-alignment command.
The ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 235


During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > Configuration Upload command.


The UPLOAD command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another UPLOAD command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the


same type

Command available only if the SNMP equipment is selected, except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP,
ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment.

3. Select the Commands > SNMP-Configuration Download command.


The Configuration Download window opens (Fig.38).

4. Depending on the operation you wish to execute, follow (from the step 3) the procedure:
To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real SNMP
equipment (pag.256)
To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual SNMP
equipment (pag.258)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 236


To reset and connect one or more equipment (Legacy)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the wished Legacy equipment.

3. Select the Commands > Legacy-Reset&Connect command.


The RESET&CONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status.
Another RESET&CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To connect one or more CommServer-S

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).
2. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be connected.

3. Select the Commands > Communication Server Board > Connect command.
The CONNECT BOARD command window opens.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed
the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following infor-
mation: IP address and name.
To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List.

4. Press Execute.

The connection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in disconnected
status.
Another CONNECT BOARD command window opens where, for each CS, there is the indication of:
CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS.
CS Name column. CS name.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-but-
ton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
The user can print the displayed information pressing Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 237


To disconnect one or more CommServer-S

It is not possible to disconnect a CS if it has at least one port in open status. In this case, first close the
port and then disconnect the CS.

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).
2. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be disconnected.

3. Select the Commands > Communication Server Board > Disconnect command.
The DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed
the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following infor-
mation: IP address and name.
To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List.
4. Press Execute.

The disconnection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in connected
or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens where, for each CS, there is the indication of:
CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS.
CS Name column. CS name.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-but-
ton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure. The user can print the displayed information pressing
Print.

To start the Command Executor application

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the user with privileged or advanced profile.

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .


The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36).

2. Select the equipment for which you wish to execute the series of SNMP commands stored on file.

3. Select the Commands > SNMP-Command Executor command.

If the message No Command available for the selected equipment is displayed, the supervision sys-
tem is not provided, for the selected equipment type, with files containing the sequences of SNMP com-
mands. SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP
commands.
The Execute Command window opens.

4. Into the Select Command area, select the desired action.

5. Press Start Command Executor.


The SNMP Command Executor window opens (Fig.49).

6. Press Start Command.


In the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed.
It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK, present in the Command Executor window displayed
at the activation of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 238


PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Proxy Agent function is an optional one. The function and the subject command are available if
requested by the customer only.

The Proxy Equipment List command displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent and
their Proxy address.
With details it is possible:
To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent (pag.239)
To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment (pag.240)

To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent

1. Select the Locate > Proxy Equipment List command.


The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens, where the list of the equipment managed by the
Proxy Agent is displayed (Fig.37).

Fig.37 Equipment Managed by Proxy window

Menu
bar (1)

Equipment
list (2)

Status
bar (3)

Fig.37 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Close. It closes the window.
Actions > Refresh. It refreshes the information present into the window.
Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters. It displays/changes the Proxy configuration parameters
of the selected equipment.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 239


(2) One record is devoted to each equipment. Such a record provides the following information:
Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment.
Type. Equipment type.
Eq. Proxy Addr. Address of the equipment that is acknowledged by the Proxy Agent: Proxy
address of the equipment (parameter defined by the user during the creation phases of the
equipment - pag.149).

The information correspond to the characteristics of the equipment at the selection of the command.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

(3) Into the status bar, the system points out the following information:
The activation of the filter. With details, if it has been activated:
The Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the equipment
managed by Proxy Agent.
The Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the equip-
ment that are not managed by the Proxy Agent.
The Managed by Proxy Agent and Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system dis-
plays into the window the all equipment.
The number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has not
been activated any filter, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the total
number of records.

To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment

1. Select the Locate > Proxy Equipment List command.


The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens (Fig.37).

2. Select the wished equipment.

3. Select the Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters command.


The Modify Proxy Parameters window opens.
Box:
Equipment Proxy Address. Address used by the Proxy Agent to acknowledge the equipment.
Primary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards
the traps coming from the equipment.
Secondary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of an additional machine to which the Proxy
Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.

4. To modify one or more parameter, type the new value into the relevant boxes.
If a NE of type ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node is selected, the addresses used by Proxy Agent to rec-
ognize the equipment belonging to the node are automatically configured.

5. Press Apply.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 240


COMMAND

The Command menu contains the commands:

Line Test (pag.242). It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
Connect (pag.244). It activates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment.
Disconnect (pag.246). It deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment.
SNMP-Force NE Disconnect (pag.248). It forces the software disconnection of the SNMP
equipment.
SNMP-Ping (pag.249). It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of
the selected SNMP equipment.
Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.250). It resets the information, stored into the NMS5UX-B data-
base, relevant to the configuration of one o more Legacy equipment and activates the dialogue
between the equipment and the system itself.
Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252). NMS5UX-B acquires the alarm status present on the equip-
ment.
Configuration Upload (pag.254). NMS5UX-B acquires the current configuration of equipment.
SNMP-Configuration Download (pag.256). It transfers the configuration of an SNMP equip-
ment to another SNMP equipment of the same type.
Communication Server Board (pag.259). It activates/deactivates the connection between
the NMS5UX-B and the CommServer-S
SNMP-Reset Equipment Controller (pag.261). It executes the software reset of the SNMP
equipment.
PMP Clear Alarm Table (pag.262). It transfers to the PMP the alarm default table stored in the
NMS5UX-B database.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 241


LINE TEST

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Line Test command verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
With details it is possible:
To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment (pag.242)
To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers (pag.242)

For more info about the command go to pag.112.

To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, for which you wish to execute the test.
2. Select the Command > Line Test > Network Element command or press .
The LINE TEST command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
3. Press Execute.
Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The test was successful.
FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed
among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs for which you wish to execute the test.
2. Select the Command > Line Test > Container command.
The LINE TEST command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

3. Press Execute.
Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 242


Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The test was successful.
FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed
among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 243


CONNECT

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Connect command activates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment.
With details it is possible:
To connect one or more equipment (pag.244)
To connect the equipment of one or more containers (pag.244)

For more info about the command go to pag.112.

To connect one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to connect.
2. Select the Command > Connect > Network Element command or press .
The CONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status.
Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms
present on the NE.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To connect the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs you wish to connect.
2. Select the Command > Connect > Container command.
The CONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 244


3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status.
Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms
present on the NE.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 245


DISCONNECT

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment.
With details it is possible:
To disconnect one or more equipment (pag.246)
To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers (pag.246)

For more info about the command go to pag.112.

To disconnect one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to disconnect.
2. Select the Command > Disconnect > Network Element command or press .
The DISCONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour it becomes brown.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) containing the NEs you wish to disconnect.

2. Select the Command > Disconnect > Container command.


The DISCONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 246


3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes its current colour brown.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 247


SNMP-FORCE NE DISCONNECT

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Force NE Disconnect command forces the software disconnection of the SNMP equipment.

With software disconnection we mean that the NMS5UX-B system set graphically the equipment in discon-
nected status (brown icon), but it does not communicate the operation to the equipment itself.

The use of this command is necessary if the equipment remains graphically blocked in maintenance status
(pink icon).

To force the software disconnection of one or more SNMP equipment

1. Select the SNMP NE or the group of SNMP NEs for which you wish to disconnect.
2. Select the Command > SNMP-Force NE Disconnect command.
The FORCED DISCONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected, unreachable or maintenance status.
Another FORCED DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour it becomes brown.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 248


SNMP-PING

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Ping command executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the select-
ed SNMP equipment.

To executes the Ping of a SNMP equipment

1. Select the wished NE object managed by SNMP protocol.


If an object of type ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node is selected, the ping will be sent to the IP address
of the main equipment of the node.

2. Select the Command > SNMP-Ping command or press the right mouse button and select Ping.
The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and re-
ceived packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
Each Ping command sends the test packet three times.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 249


LEGACY-RESET&CONNECT

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Reset&Connect command resets the information, stored into the NMS5UX-B database, rel-
evant to the configuration of one o more Legacy equipment and activates the dialogue between the equip-
ment and the system itself.
With details it is possible:
To reset and connect one or more Legacy equipment (pag.250)
To reset and connect the Legacy equipment of one or more containers (pag.250)

For more info about the command go to pag.113.

To reset and connect one or more Legacy equipment

1. Select the Legacy equipment that you wish to reset and connect.

2. Select the Command > Legacy-Reset&Connect > Network Element command.


The RESET&CONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

3. Press Execute.
The reset and connection request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the list and in dis-
connected or unreachable status.
Another RESET&CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour it becomes brown.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To reset and connect the Legacy equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) containing the Legacy equipment that you wish to reset and connect.

2. Select the Command > Legacy-Reset&Connect > Container command.


The RESET&CONNECT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 250


To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

3. Press Execute.

The reset and connection request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the list and in dis-
connected or unreachable status.
Another RESET&CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes its current colour brown.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 251


ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Alarm Re-alignment command acquires the alarm status present on the equipment.
With details it is possible:
To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment (pag.252)
To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers (pag.252)

For more info about the command go to pag.113.

To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to re-align the alarms.
2. Select the Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Network Element command or press .
The ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs for which you wish the re-align the alarms.

2. Select the Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Container command.


The ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

3. Press Execute.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 252


The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 253


CONFIGURATION UPLOAD

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Configuration Upload command acquires the current configuration of equipment.


With details it is possible:
To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment (pag.254)
To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers (pag.254)

For more info about the command go to pag.113.

To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to acquire the configuration.
2. Select the Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element command or press .
The UPLOAD command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.
3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs, which you wish to acquire the configuration.

2. Select the Command > Configuration Upload > Container command.


The UPLOAD command window opens.
In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed.
Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

3. Press Execute.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 254


The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For
example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the com-
mand to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the
second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will
terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 255


SNMP-CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Configuration Download command transfers the configuration of an equipment to another


equipment of the same type.
With details it is possible:
To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real SNMP
equipment (pag.256).
To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual SNMP
equipment (pag.258).

The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP,
ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window
(pag.48/pag.49).

For more info on the real and virtual NE objects go to pag.79.

To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or


more real SNMP equipment

1. Select the SNMP equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the SNMP
equipment wished for the transferring of the configuration.

2. Select the Command > SNMP-Configuration Download command.


The Configuration Download window opens (Fig.38).

3. Select, in the Source area, the (real or virtual) NE having the configuration you wish to transfer.

4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Real Equipment (download) option.

5. Press Parameter Selection to define the configuration parameters you wish to transfer.
The View Download Parameter window opens.
In the area:
Group, the logic groups, which the configuration parameters of the type of the considered equip-
ment are subdivided in, are displayed.
Attributes, the attributes relevant to the selected group in the Group area are displayed.
Each group and parameter is characterized by a check box.
If the box is active, it points out that the group/parameter will be transferred during the download. If
the box is inactive, it points out that the group/parameter will not be transferred during the download.
6. Activate the check boxes relevant to the groups/parameters that you do not wish to transfer.

The activation of one group is prioritary with respect to the setting of the parameters contained in
it. For example, if the group A is activated, when the configuration will be transferred, the values of the
parameters associated to the group A will be transferred, even if the box of the single parameters is
not active.
In order to activate all the check boxes at the same time, press Select all. In order to deactivate all
the check boxes at the same time, press Deselect all.

7. Select, in the Destination area, the NE or the group of NEs to which you wish to transfer the configu-
ration.
8. Select the Command > Download Configuration command and confirm.
In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 256


Fig.38 Configuration Download window

Menu
bar (1)

List of (real
and/or virtual)
NEs, present
in the map, List of (real
with the same and/or virtual
characteristics (3)) NEs, present
(type and values of in the map, with
the configuration the same
parameters) of characteristics
the selected NE, (type and values
from which it is of the configuration
possible to COPY parameters) of the
the configuration selected NE, to
to transfer (2) which it is possible
to TRANSFER
the configuration
(4)
This area
displays,
in form of
messages,
the operations
in progress

Fig.38 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Close. It closes the window.
Command > Download Configuration. It transfer the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE
to one or more real NEs.
Command > Copy Configuration. It transfer the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE to one
or more virtual NEs.
Action > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

(2) In the list, it is possible to display real and virtual NEs at the same time.
For the first ones, it is necessary to activate the Real Equipment box, for the second ones the Virtual
Equipment box.

(3) In the list, it is possible to display only real NEs or only virtual NEs.
To display the real ones, it is necessary to select the Real Equipment (download) option, to display
the virtual ones the Virtual Equipment (copy) option.

(4) The list will not contain the (real or virtual) NE selected in the Source area, as the NE, which the
configuration to be transferred from is taken, is automatically excluded by the list of the NEs which
the configuration can be transferred to.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 257


To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or
more virtual SNMP equipment

1. Select the SNMP equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the wished
SNMP equipment for the transfer of the configuration.

2. Select the Command > SNMP-Configuration Download command.


The Configuration Download window opens (Fig.38).

3. Select, in the Source area, the (real or virtual) NE having the configuration you wish to transfer.

4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Virtual Equipment (copy) option.

5. Select from the list the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to transfer to configuration to.

6. Select the Command > Copy Configuration command and confirm.


In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 258


COMMUNICATION SERVER BOARD

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Communication Server Board command activates/deactivates the connection between the
NMS5UX-B and the CommServer-S.
With details it is possible:
To connect one or more CommServer-S (pag.259)
To disconnect one or more CommServer-S (pag.259)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been
installed.

To connect one or more CommServer-S

1. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be connected.

2. Select the Command > Communication Server Board > Connect command.
The CONNECT BOARD command window opens.
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed
the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following infor-
mation: IP address and name.
To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List.

3. Press Execute.
The connection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in disconnected
status.
Another CONNECT BOARD command window opens, where for each CS there is the indication of:
CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS.
CS Name column. CS name.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-but-
ton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
To print the displayed information press Print.

To disconnect one or more CommServer-S

It is not possible to disconnect a CS if it has at least one port in open status.


In this case, first close the port and then disconnect the CS.
The modalities to open/close the ports of the CommServer-S are reported in the equipment manual.

1. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be disconnected.

2. Select the Command > Communication Server Board > Disconnect command.
The DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 259


Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed
the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following infor-
mation: IP address and name.
To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List.

3. Press Execute.

The disconnection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in connected
or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens, where for each CS there is the indication of:
CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS.
CS Name column. CS name.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-but-
ton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 260


SNMP-RESET EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Reset Equipment Controller command executes the software reset of the equipment.

The operation consists in the re-initialization of all the communication channels (for example, with the su-
pervision system) of the equipment. Its execution causes a temporary disconnection of the equipment from
NMS5UX-B.

The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc.

To execute the software reset of an SNMP equipment

1. Select the equipment.


2. Select the Command > SNMP-Reset Equipment Controller command.
At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 261


PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Superuser

The PMP Clear Alarm Table command transfer to the PMP equipment the default table of the alarms
stored in the NMS5UX-B database.

The files, which contains the tables of the default alarms relevant to each type of NE managed by the
NMS5UX-B, are copied in the database during the installation of the system.

To transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms

1. Select the PMP.

2. Select the Command > PMP Clear Alarm Table command.


At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 262


FAULT

The Fault menu contains the following commands:

Network Alarm History (pag.264). It displays/manages the alarm history stored in the
NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
Network Current Alarms (pag.273). It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment
of the open map.
Old Alarm History (pag.279). It displays/manages the alarm history previously saved to file.
NE Alarm History (pag.285). It displays/manages the alarm history of an equipment.
NE Current Alarms (pag.286). It displays/manages the alarms active in an equipment.
SNMP-NE History Log (pag.287). It displays/manages the alarm list stored on the controller
of a SNMP equipment.
SNMP-NE Command Log (pag.291). It displays/manages the list of the operations executed
by the users, stored on the controller of a SNMP equipment.
Alarm Summary (pag.295). It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history stored in
the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
SNMP-Event Statistics (pag.300). It displays the alarm statistics of all SNMP equipment
present in the network.
Transaction Log (pag.305). It displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the
NMS5UX users, who have modified the configuration of the network, of the supervision system
and of an equipment.

The alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signalling.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 263


NETWORK ALARM HISTORY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms.

The Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signall-
ings (alarms) stored in the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
With details it is possible:
To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map (pag.264)
To save/print the alarms list (pag.266)
To copy the alarms list to a text editor (pag.267)
To delete the alarms (pag.267)
To mark the alarms (pag.267)
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (pag.268)
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.268)
To filter the alarms list (pag.269)
To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (pag.270)
To verify the time interval between two different alarms (pag.270)
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment (pag.271)
To sort the alarms list (pag.271)

As help to the description of the command, see:


Modality of the updating of data (pag.271)
Modality of recording the alarms (pag.272)

To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens, where the alarm history of the equipment present in the
open map is displayed (Fig.39).

At the opening of the window a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection
date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic
updating of the information is inactive.

A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms great-
er than N.
For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronological order from the newest to the
oldest one, until N.
The N limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the displaying of the alarms.
In order to read the alarms successive to N, it is sufficient to delete some records.
The N limit can be modified by the Superuser.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 264


Fig.39 Alarm History Browser window

Menu
bar (1)

Alarms
list (2)

Status
bar (3)

Fig.39 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the alarms list.
File > Export. It copies into a text editor the alarms list.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the databases.
Action > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system mem-
orizes that the user has seen the alarms.
Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed one in alternative
to the other: the first stops the automatic updating of the data, the second one reactivates it.
Action > Re-read Database. It updates the data present in the window.
View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list.
View > Elapsed Time. It determines the time interval between the recordings of two different
alarms.
View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights in the map the symbol of the NE which
the selected record is referred to.
View > ClearHighlights. It removes the highlighted condition from all the symbols marked
by the HighLight Equipment On Map command.
View > Equipment Info. It displays the characteristics and the operating status of the NE
which the selected record is referred to.
View > Sort Mode. It sorts the alarms list.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

(2) The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:


Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event and if the signalling has been detected
or is cleared; for the alarms also the severity is displayed.
The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:
Background colour Wording Description
Green Normal Detected event signalling
Blue Status Detected status signalling
Light blue Warning Detected alarm with Warning severity
Yellow Minor Detected alarm with Minor severity
Orange Major Detected alarm with Major severity
Red Critical Detected alarm with Critical severity
No background Normal Cleared event signalling
No background Status Cleared status signalling
No background Warning Cleared alarm with Warning severity
No background Minor Cleared alarm with Minor severity
No background Major Cleared alarm with Major severity
No background Critical Cleared alarm with Critical severity

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 265


Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked, if
the character is present:
S, means that the record has been marked when the alarm has been detected but not
cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to mark the record again.
C, means that the record has been not marked when the alarm has been detected
and cleared.
Set Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
Clear Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
Type. Type of Network Element.
Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signallings
is not provided with this information.
Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE con-
troller.

(3) The symbol:


, indicates that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed.
, indicates that the data are dynamically updated.
, indicates that the displayed data are misaligned with respect to those stored in the da-
tabase; to re-align them, select the symbol itself.
Field:
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is
active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
Filters:... Activation of one or more filters.
Sort:... Order used to list the alarms.

To save/print the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. To print or save to a file:


A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected command.
The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active,
the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
The Output Device Selection window opens.

3. To print the data:


a. Select the Output To Printer option.
In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:
a. Select the Output To File option.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the info must be saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 266


To copy the alarms list to a text editor

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. To copy into a text editor:


A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Export > Selected command.
The list of displayed alarms, select the File > Export > Filtered command. If no filter is active,
the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
The default text editor window opens.
For the use of the text program, refer to the specific documentation.

To delete the alarms

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile.
The operation is not available if the symbol is present in the status bar of the Alarm History Browser
window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check sign.

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. To delete from the list and from the NMS5UX-B database:


A group of alarms, select the records and the Action > Delete > Selected Alarms command.
The displayed alarms, select the Action > Delete > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters
are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Delete > All Alarms command.
The records are deleted.

To mark the alarms

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile.
The operation is not executed if the symbol is present in the status bar of the Alarm History Browser
window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check sign.
After a record has been marked, the operation cannot be undone.

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. To mark:
A group of alarms, select the records and the Action > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms
command.
The displayed alarms, select the Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If the
filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.
It is possible to mark an alarm also by a double click of the mouse button.
The Acknowledged Info window opens.
The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the marking of the records. The
value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The
value cannot be changed.

3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max
16 characters); it can be used later as search criterion.
The setting of this parameter is optional.

4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters).
The setting of this parameter is optional.

5. Press Ok.
If the selected record refers to an alarm:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 267


Detected, but not cleared yet, the record will be marked with the letter S.
Detected and cleared, the record will be marked with the letter C.
Only for the records marked with the letter S, when the relevant alarm is cleared, it will be possible to
mark, by means of the present procedure, the record again. After the second marking, the letter S will
be replaced by the letter C.

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for.

3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.


The Ack Info pop-up window opens, where the acknowledge info of the alarm is displayed (Fig.40).

Fig.40 Ack Info window

Identification
code (1)
Detailed
information
of the
acknowledge
when the signal
was in status:
Detailed detected
information (2) (3)
of the
acknowledge
when the signal
was in status:
detected and
cleared
(2) (3)

Fig.40 notes

(1) Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge.
(2) Option:
User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record.
Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:min-
utes:seconds>.
Comment. Additional information.

(3) If the alarm has been acknowledged the first time when it was in detected-cleared status, the data
present in the SET Ack Info and CLEAR Ack Info areas are the same.
If the alarm has never been acknowledged, all the fields will be empty.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).
At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive.

2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Unfreeze Window command or
the symbol .

3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Freeze Window com-
mand or the symbol .

The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 268


To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. Select the View > Set Filter command.


The Filters Setting window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that con-
tains the following options:
<Severity>. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signalling and, for
the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated
to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box:
Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed.
Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed.
Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed.
Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed.
Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed.
Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed.
Active Alarms, the detected alarms will be displayed.
Cleared Alarms, the detected and cleared alarms will be displayed.
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms.
Activating the box.
Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after
that displayed next to the option.
Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before
that displayed next to the option.
To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling
bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar.
In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify
the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one
second.
Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to de-
termine a time interval.
Match Address. Logical address of the Network Element.
It is possible to set the logic address by means of one of the following ways:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the map and press Add
From Map.
Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Re-
move push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE.
To set the criterion:
Open the Equipment Type menu and choose the type of NE.
Open the Object menu and set the wished object.
It is possible to set only one class of object at a time or all the class contemporarily selecting
the All Objects item.
Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message field) of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Alarm History Browser window.
The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are select-
ed.
Match Message String. Description of the alarm.
To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; de-
activating the box, no distinction will be made.
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the marked records will be displayed. Furthermore, it
is possible to specify:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 269


The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating
the TIC box and typing the code.
The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box
and typing the username.
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the record not yet marked will be displayed.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays in the Alarm History Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
When the Alarm History Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.
In the window, there are the push-buttons:
Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file.
On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK.
Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Ac-
knowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.
Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
Help. It opens the on-line manual.
The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. Select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight.


3. Select the View > HighLight Equipment On Map command.
In the map, the symbol of the NE is highlighted.
To deselect the symbol, select the command View > ClearHighlights.

To verify the time interval between two different alarms

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. To determinate the time interval that separates:


The detection of an alarm from its clearing, select a single detected/cleared alarm and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time command.
The detection of two alarms, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set command.
The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > First
Set->Last Clear command.
The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time >Clear
->Set command.
A window opens with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 270


To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. Select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment.


Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the
specific Equipment Information windows.

3. Select the View > Equipment Info command.


The Equipment Information window opens which displays the characteristics and the operating status
of the equipment (Fig.26).

To sort the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .


The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39).

2. Select the View > Sort Mode command.


The Sort Mode window opens.
3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion:
Set Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.
* CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not
cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0.

4. Select in the Sort by area, the option:


Ascending; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in descending order.
Descending; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in ascending order.

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the box Group by Ad-
dress (second sorting criterion).

6. Press Apply (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Set (it stores the setting, but does not
execute the sorting and closes the window).
If pressed Apply, the Alarm History Browser window will list the records in the set order.

Modality of updating of the data

The information present in the Alarm History Browser window are dynamically updated only if the proce-
dure for the automatic updating is active (pag.268).

At the opening of the Alarm History Browser window, the procedure of automatic updating of the infor-
mation is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).

The presence of the symbol in the status bar of the window points out that the displayed information
are misaligned with respect to those stored in the database of NMS5UX-B.
This occurs when:
Two or more NMS5UX users (each one on a different terminal) have opened the Alarm History
Browser window for the same map and, in a window, some records have been marked or delet-
ed, the system does not update all the open windows. This is necessary to avoid that the win-
dows must be continuously refreshed while the users are using them.
One or more records are marked in a Current Alarms Browser window. The record is not auto-
matically marked also in the Alarm History Browser window, if open.
To update the window, it is sufficient to click on the symbol . It is possible to refresh the window also
modifying the order of the displaying of the records (pag.271) or applying a filter (pag.269).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 271


The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a Alarm History Browser window does
not influence the displaying of the information in the other open Alarm History Browser windows or in the
Current Alarms Browser window.

Modality of recording of the alarms

The alarms are stored in the database of NMS5UX-B (Alarm History table).

They remain stored for a certain number of days (which can be configured by the Superuser - by default
90 days), after which they are automatically deleted.

Also, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records in the Alarm History table (value that can
be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.

During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds
the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maxi-
mum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and cleared signallings, the oldest records.

If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the maximum set
value, the system will NOT delete any record.

When the maximum number of record in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History occupation ex-
ceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The display of the message and
the frequency with which it is displayed can be configured by the Superuser.

In any moment, it is possible:


To display the occupation status of the table Transaction Log in the platform status bar (see
pag.45).
To manually delete the alarms (pag.267). It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to
file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the table.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 272


NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Network Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms)
active in the equipment of the open map.

With details it is possible:


To display alarms active in the equipment of the map (pag.273)
To save/print the alarms list (pag.275)
To mark the alarms (pag.275)
To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.275)
To filter the alarms list (pag.276)
To highlight, in the map, the symbol of an equipment (pag.277)
To verify the time interval between two different alarms (pag.277)
To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment (pag.278)

As help to the description of the command, see par. Modality of updating of the data (pag.278).

To display alarms active in the equipment of the map

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment in the
map is displayed (Fig.41).

At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive.

Fig.41 Current Alarms Browser window

Menu
bar (1)

Alarms
list (2)

Status
bar (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 273


Fig.41 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the alarm list.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, so that the system memorizes that
the user has seen the alarms.
Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed alternatively: the
first one stops the automatic updating of the data, the seconds re-activates it.
Action > Re-read Database. It updates the data present in the window.
View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list.
View > Elapsed Time. It determines the time interval that separates the recording of two
different alarms.
View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights, in the map, the symbol of the NE which
the selected record is referred to.
View > ClearHighlights. It deletes the condition of highlighted from all the symbols marked
by the HighLight Equipment On Map commands.
View > Equipment Info. It displays characteristics and the functional status of the NE which
the selected record is referred to.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

(2) For each alarm, it is pointed out in the column:


Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status or event; for the alarms the severity is pointed
out too. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:

Background colour Wording Description


Green Normal Event signalling
Blue Status Status signalling
Light blue Warning Alarm with Warning severity
Yellow Minor Alarm with Minor severity
Orange Major Alarm with Major severity
Red Critical Alarm with Critical severity
Ack. Marking status of the record.
If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked; if the Y character is present, the alarm
has been marked.
Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. The date/time is set by the element that
generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller.
Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
Type. Type of Network Element.
Object. Name of the physical or logic object which the alarm is referred to. The event signal-
lings are not provided with this information.
Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

(3) The symbol:


, points out that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed.
, points out that the data are dynamically updated.
Field:
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is
active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
Filters:... Activation of one or more filters.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 274


To save/print the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41).

2. To print or to save to file:


A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected command.
The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If filters are not ac-
tive, the displayed records corresponds to the records stored in the database.
The Output Device Selection window opens.

3. To print the data:

a. Select the Output To Printer option.


In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:

a. Select the Output To File option.


Option available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged profile.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To mark the alarms

After having marked a record, the operation cannot be cancelled.

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41).

2. To mark:
A group of alarms, select the records and then the Action > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms
command.
The displayed alarms, select the Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If fil-
ters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.
It is also possible to mark an alarm, by means of a double click over it.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41).
At the opening of the window, the automatic updating of the information is, by default, inactive.

2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Unfreeze Window command or
the symbol .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 275


3. To deactivate newly the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Freeze Window com-
mand or the symbol .

The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively.

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41).

2. Select the View > Set Filter command.


The Filters Setting window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing
the following operation:
Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the
colour of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
of signalling). Activating the box:
Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed.
Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed.
Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed.
Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed.
Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed.
Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed.
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm.
Activating the box:
Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after
that displayed next to the option.
Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or
before that displayed next to the option.
To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling
bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar.
In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify
the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one
second.
Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determi-
nate a time interval.
Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press
Add From Map.
Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.
The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete from the list a single item pressing, after having highlighted it, the Re-
move push-button, or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE.
To set the criterion:
Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE.
Open the Object menu and set the wished object.
It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting
the All Objects item.
Match Message String. Description of the selection.
To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases;
deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 276


Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Current Alarms Browser window.
The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are select-
ed.
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms.
Activating the box:
Match Acknowledged, the list will display only the marked records.
Match Unacknowledged, the list will display the not yet marked records.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays, in the Current Alarms Browser window, only the records that satisfy the activated
criteria.
Each time the list is filtered, all the records are displayed, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
When the Current Alarms Browser window is closed, the possible activation of filters is automatically
cancelled.

The window contains the push-buttons:


Save.... It saves to file the set criteria.
On the selection of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file into the Selection box and press OK.
Load.... It opens the file, where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained.
On the selection of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens.
Select the wished file into the Files list and press OK.
Delete.... It deletes the file where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained.
On the selection of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens.
Select the wished file into the Files list and press OK.
Clear Filters. It cancels the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match
Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.
Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
Help. It opens the on-line manual.

The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41).

2. Select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight.

3. Select the View > HighLight Equipment On Map command.


The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map.
To deselect the symbol, select the View > ClearHighlights command.

To verify the time interval between two different alarms

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41).

2. Select two different adjacent or not adjacent records

3. Select the View > Elapsed Time command.


A window with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 277


To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .


The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41).

2. Select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment


Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the
specific Equipment Information windows.

3. Select the View > Equipment Info command.


The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.26) that displays the characteristics and the functional
status of the equipment.

Modality of updating of the data

The information present in the Current Alarms Browser window are dynamically updated only if the proce-
dure of automatic updating is active (pag.268).

At the opening of the Current Alarms Browser window, the procedure of automatic updating is, by de-
fault, inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 278


OLD ALARM HISTORY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Old Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings
(alarms) previously saved to file.
With details it is possible:
To display the alarm history present in the Old History table (pag.279)
To save/print the alarms list (pag.281)
To copy the alarms list into a text editor (pag.281)
To filter the alarms list (pag.281)
To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (pag.283)
To verify the time interval between two different alarms (pag.283)
To sort the alarms list (pag.284)
To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (pag.284)

In the Old History table is stored the alarm history saved by the Alarm History Backup (pag.423)
command and restored by the Alarm History Restore (pag.424) command.

To display the alarm history present in the Old History table

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens, where the alarms history present in the Old History table of
the equipment present in the open map is displayed (Fig.42).

If, at the opening of the window, the table is empty, it is necessary to restore from the backup file
saved before, the list of wished alarms (pag.424).
These alarms will remain available in the Old History table and in the Old History Browser window, until
a different list of alarms is restored.

Fig.42 Old History Browser window

Menu
bar (1)

Alarms
list (2)

Status
bar (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 279


Fig.42 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the alarms list.
File > Export. It copies in a text editor the alarms list.
File > Close. It closes the window.
Action > Re-read Database. It updates the data present in the window.
View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list.
View > Elapsed Time. It determinates the time intervals that separates two different alarms.
View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights in the map, the symbol of the NE which
the selected record refers to.
View > ClearHighlights. It removes the condition of highlighted from all the symbols marked
by the HighLight Equipment On Map command.
View > Sort Mode. It sorts the list of records.
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

(2) For each alarm, it is pointed out in the column:


Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status or event and if the signalling has been detected
or cleared; for the alarms the severity is pointed out too. The parameter is represented by
a coloured box and by a wording, in detail:
Background colour Wording Description
Green Normal Detected event signalling
Blue Status Detected status signalling
Light blue Warning Detected alarm with Warning severity
Yellow Minor Detected alarm with Minor severity
Orange Major Detected alarm with Major severity
Red Critical Detected alarm with Critical severity
No background Normal Cleared event signalling
No background Status Cleared status signalling
No background Warning Cleared alarm with Warning severity
No background Minor Cleared alarm with Minor severity
No background Major Cleared alarm with Major severity
No background Critical Cleared alarm with Critical severity
Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked, if
the character is present:
S, means that the record has been marked when the alarm has been detected but not
cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to mark the record again.
C, means that the record has been not marked when the alarm has been detected
and cleared.
Set Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
Clear Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
Type. Type of Network Element.
Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signallings
is not provided with this information.
Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE con-
troller.

(3) Field:
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If filters are
not active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total records.
Filters:... Activation of one or more filters.
Sort:... Order used to list the alarms.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 280


To save/print the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42).

2. To print or to save to a file:


A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected command.
The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If filters are not ac-
tive, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
The Output Device Selection window opens.
3. To print the data:

a. Select the Output To Printer option.


In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:

a. Select the Output To File option.


b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To copy the alarms list into a text editor

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42).

2. To copy into a text editor:


A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Export > Selected command.
The displayed alarms, select the File > Export > Filtered command. If filters are not active,
the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
The default text editor window opens.
For the use of the text editor program, refer to the specific documentation.

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42).

2. Select the View > Set Filter command.


The Filters Setting window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing
the following options:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 281


<Severity>. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the col-
our of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
of signalling). Activating the box:
Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed.
Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed.
Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed.
Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed.
Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed.
Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed.
Active Alarms, the detected alarms will be displayed.
Cleared Alarms, the detected and cleared alarms will be displayed.
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm.
Activating the box:
Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after
that displayed next to the option.
Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or
before that displayed next to the option.
To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling
bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar.
In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify
the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one
second.
Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determi-
nate a time interval.
Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press
Add From Map.
Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.
The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete from the list a single item pressing, after having highlighted it, the Re-
move push-button, or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE.
To set the criterion:
Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE.
Open the Object menu and set the wished object.
It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting
the All Objects item.
Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Old History Browser window.
The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are select-
ed.
Match Message String. Description of the selection.
To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases;
deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made.
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the marked record. Furthermore it
is possible to specify:
The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating
the TIC box and typing the code.
The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box
and typing the username.
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not marked yet will be displayed.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 282


The system displays in the Old History Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
When the Old History Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared

In the window, there are the push-buttons:


Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file.
On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK.
Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Ac-
knowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.
Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
Help. It opens the on-line manual.

The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42).

2. Select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight.


3. Select the View > HighLight Equipment On Map command.
The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map.
To deselect the symbol, select the View > ClearHighlights command.

To verify the time interval between two different alarms

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42).
2. To determinate the time interval that separates:
The detection of an alarm from its clearing, select a single detected/cleared alarm and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time command.
The detection of two alarms, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records and then the
View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set command.
The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > First
Set->Last Clear command.
The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > Clear-
>Set command
A window opens with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 283


To sort the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42).

2. Select the View > Sort Mode command.


The Sort Mode window opens.
3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion:
Set Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.
* CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not
cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0.

4. Select in the Sort by area, the option:


Ascending; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in descending order.
Descending; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones
will be listed in ascending order.

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the box Group by Ad-
dress (second sorting criterion).

6. Press Apply (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Set (it stores the setting, but does not
execute the sorting and closes the window).
If pressed Apply, the Old History Browser window will list the records in the set order.

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command.


The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42).
2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for.

3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.


The Ack Info pop-up window opens, where the acknowledge information of the alarm is displayed.
The description of the window is the same reported in Fig.40.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 284


NE ALARM HISTORY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms.

The NE Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/event/status signallings
(alarms) relevant ONLY to the selected equipment.

The choice of the command opens the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39).

The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the
par. Network Alarm History (pag.264).

Into the Alarm History Browser window to display the alarm relevant to other equipment, deactivate the
Match Address filter.

If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Alarm History Browser window displays
the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 285


NE CURRENT ALARMS

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The NE Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/event/status signallings (alarms) active
in the selected equipment.

The choice of the command opens the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41).

The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the
par. Network Current Alarms (pag.273).

Into the Current Alarms Browser window to display the alarm relevant to other equipment, deactivate the
Match Address filter.

If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Current Alarms Browser window dis-
plays the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 286


SNMP-NE HISTORY LOG

System access Reading/Writing Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Reading Entry
Reading/Writing Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE History Log command displays/manages the alarm list stored on the controller of an
equipment (NE Log).
With details it is possible:
To display the list of the NE Log of a SNMP equipment (pag.287)
To create a NE Log (pag.288)
To create more NE logs at the same time (pag.288)
To display the content of a NE Log (pag.289)
To delete a NE Log (pag.289)
To delete all the NE logs of a SNMP equipment (pag.289)
To delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment (pag.290)

The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP.

For more information about the NE Log go to pag.129.

To display the list of the NE Log of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command.


The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens.

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log.
The area on the right displays the list of the NE Logs (Fig.43).
If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no NE Log is available for the specific
equipment.

Fig.43 Equipment History Log Management Main Window

Logic address
of the equipment
which the NE logs
present in the area
below are referred to

List of the NE
List of logs, stored
equipment in the disk,
selected in relevant to
the map (1) a single
equipment (2)

List of the selected


NE Logs for which
it is possible to
display the detail of
the signallings (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 287


Fig.43 notes

(1) Each equipment is identified by a record that contains:


The symbol representing the type of equipment.
IP address of the equipment.
Logic address of the equipment.
When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal
system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

(2) Each NE Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time (hour:min-
utes:seconds) of the file creation are contained.
When a Log is inactive, it means that it has been selected to be displayed.
When the NE Log is removed from the Selected Files List area, the record that represents it is re-
activated.

(3) Each NE Log is identified by a record that contains:


The symbol that represents the type of the equipment.
The IP address of the equipment.
The logic address of the equipment.
The date_time when the file has been created

To create a NE Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command.


The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43).

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log.

4. Press the right mouse button.


A pop-up menu opens.

5. Select the command:


Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the NE Log and delete the alarms stored in the
controller of the equipment.
Send Read File Request, to create the NE Log, without deleting the alarms.
The created NE Log is displayed in the...history log file area.
NE Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time when it
has been created.
If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no
alarm is stored in the equipment controller.

To create more NE Logs at the same time

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command.


The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43).

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log.

4. Press Read log Files from Equipment.


The created NE Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the
date_time when they have been created.
If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no
alarm is stored in the equipment controller.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 288


To display the content of a NE Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command.


The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43).

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the NE Logs relevant to the selected equipment will be pointed
out.

4. Double click on the NE Log for which you wish to verify the content.
The NE Log is displayed in the Selected files list area. The file, in the ...history log files area, is disabled.

5. Repeat the previous step, to insert all the wished NE Logs in the Selected files list area.

6. It is possible to remove from the Selected files list area:


A single file selecting the icon that characterize the file and pressing the right mouse button. A
pop-up menu is displayed. Press Remove From List.
All the files, pressing Clear selections.

7. Press Show selected files records.


The NE Logger Browser window opens, where all the alarms stored on the selected NE Logs are listed.
The elements present in the window are the same of the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39), except
for some commands, present in the Alarm History Browser window, but not in the NE Logger Browser
window.

To delete a NE Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command.


The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43).

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete a NE Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the NE Log relevant to the selected equipment will be displayed.

4. Select the NE Log and press the right mouse button.


A pop-up menu opens.

5. Select the Delete File command and confirm.


The file is deleted.
A deactivated file cannot be deleted.

To delete all the NE Logs of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.


2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command.
The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43).

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete all the NE Logs.

4. Select the right mouse button.


A pop-up menu opens.

5. Select the Delete All Files command and confirm.


All the NE Logs of the equipment are deleted.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 289


To delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command.


The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43).

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete the alarms.

4. Select the NE Log command and press the right mouse button.
A pop-up menu opens.

5. Select the Send Delete File Request command.

It is possible to delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment also during the creation of
a NE Log (pag.288).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 290


SNMP-NE COMMAND LOG

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Command Log command displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the us-
ers, stored on the controller of an equipment (NE Command Log).
With details it is possible:
To display the list of the Command Log of a SNMP equipment (pag.291)
To create a Command Log (pag.292)
To create more Command Logs at the same time (pag.293)
To display the content of a Command Log (pag.293)
To delete a Command Log (pag.294)
To delete all the Command Logs of a SNMP equipment (pag.294)
To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment (pag.294)

The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc.

For more information about the NE Command Log go to pag.294.

To display the list of the Command Log of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command.


The Equipment History Command Log Management Main window opens.

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to verify the Command Log.
The area on the right displays the list of the Command Logs (Fig.44).
If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no Command Log is available for the
specific equipment.

Fig.44 Equipment History Command Log Management Main window

Logic address
of the equipment
which the NE logs
present in the area
below are referred to

List of the NE
List of logs, stored
equipment in the disk,
selected in relevant to
the map (1) a single
equipment (2)

List of the selected


NE Logs for which
it is possible to
display the detail of
the signallings (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 291


Fig.44 notes

(1) Each equipment is identified by a record that contains:


The symbol representing the type of equipment.
IP address of the equipment.
Logic address of the equipment.
When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red.

(2) Each Command Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time
(hour:minutes:seconds) of the file creation are contained.

To create a Command Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command.


The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44).
3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log.

4. Press the right mouse button.


A pop-up menu opens.
5. Select the command:
Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the Command Log and delete the list of the oper-
ations stored in the controller of the equipment.
Send Read File Request, to create the Command Log, without deleting the list of the opera-
tions.
The Command Log Filter Win opens.
To save on Command Log:
All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment.
A group of operations, set one or more parameters present in the window, according to
the criteria you wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and,
then, press Read log Files from Equipment.
The available criteria are the following ones:
Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has
been executed the operation.
To set the criterion type a IP address.
Occurred date. Execution date of the operations.
To set the criterion, activate the box:
Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only
the operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one.
After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only
the operations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the
set one.
Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible
to set a time interval.
User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired use name.
Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which
the operation refers.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired object.
The created Command Log is displayed in the...history log file area.
Command Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time
when it has been created.
If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no
operation is stored in the equipment controller.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 292


To create more Command Logs at the same time

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command.


The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44).

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log.

4. Press Read log Files from Equipment.


The Command Log Filter Win opens.

5. To save on Command Logs:


All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment.
A group of operation, set one or more parameters present in the window, according to the cri-
teria you wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and, then, press
Read log Files from Equipment.
The available criteria are the following ones:
Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been
executed the operation.
To set the criterion type a IP address.
Occurred date. Execution date of the operations.
To set the criterion, activate the box:
Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the
operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one.
After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the op-
erations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the set one.
Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible to set
a time interval.
User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired use name.
Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the op-
eration refers.
To set the criterion type into the box the desired object.
The created Command Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the
date_time when they have been created.
If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no
operation is stored in the equipment controller.

To display the content of a Command Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command.


The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44).

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to verify the Command Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Logs relevant to the selected equipment will be
pointed out.

4. Double click on the Command Log for which you wish to verify the content.
The Commands Log File Information window is displayed where, for each operation, is pointed out in
the column:
Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation.
Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been executed
the operation.
User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
Object. Object to which the operation refers.
Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
Value Set. Set value.
The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is a not signif-
icant one for the type of operation to which it refers.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 293


To delete a Command Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command.


The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44).

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to delete a Command Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Log relevant to the selected equipment will be
displayed.

4. Select the Command Log and press the right mouse button.
A pop-up menu opens.

5. Select the Delete File command and confirm.


The file is deleted.

To delete all the Command Logs of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command.


The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44).

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete all the Command
Logs.
4. Select the right mouse button.
A pop-up menu opens.

5. Select the Delete All Files command and confirm.


All the Command Logs of the equipment are deleted.

To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of a SNMP equip-
ment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment.

2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command.


The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44).
3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete the list of the op-
erations.

4. Select t the right mouse button.


A pop-up menu opens.

5. Select the Send Delete File Request command.


It is possible to delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of an equipment also during the
creation of a Command Log (pag.292).

NE Command Log (more info)

NE Command Log is a file where the system records the operations executed by the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX
user stored into the controller of the selected equipment.
The Log read from equipment (Command Log) is stored on the disk of the machine and it remains available
for subsequent consultations done by the user.
The list of the Command Log and their contents can be displayed only through the Equipment History Com-
mand Log Management Main window (Fig.44).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 294


ALARM SUMMARY

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Alarm Summary command displays/manages the summary of the alarm/status/event signallings
(alarms) stored in the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.

With detail it is possible:


To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equip-
ment present in the map (pag.295)
To filter the alarms list (pag.297)
To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (pag.298)
To reset the indication of status change (pag.299)
To set the automatic updating of the data (pag.299)

To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity rel-
evant to the equipment present in the map

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command.


The Siae Alarm Summary window opens, where the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the
severity relevant to the equipment present in the map is displayed (Fig.45).

Fig.45 Siae Alarm Summary window

Activation
status of
the filters
(1) Automatic
updating
of data (2)

Data
Indication of refresh
"Status" time (3)
change (4)

Number of
alarms
subdivided
according
type and
severity (5)

Number of
alarms
detected
but not
cleared yet (8)
Criterion used
Number of
to subdivide
alarms
the alarms (6)
detected
and cleared
Push-buttons (7)
(9)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 295


Fig.45 notes

(1) Label:
Filters: NONE. There are not filters active.
Filters: <applied filters>. There are indicated filters active.
It is possible to insert a description in this area (pag.297).

(2) If the box is:


Active, it means that the window is automatically updated each N seconds. The parameter
N is displayed in the Timeout (sec) box.
In this condition the Refresh push-button is not available.
Inactive, it means that the window is not automatically updated. To update it, it is necessary
to press Refresh.

(3) Interval (in seconds) between an automatic update of the data and the next one
The parameter is meaningful only when the Auto Refresh box is active.

(4) The presence of the asterisk next to the record points out that, from when the Siae Alarm Summary
window has been opened or from the last selection of the Clear Alert push-button, a change oc-
curred: an alarm has been detected or cleared.

(5) It is possible that, in the Siae Alarm Summary window, there are not one or more records relevant
to the type of signallings/severity levels. Their presence is subjected to the activation of filters.
When the box is deactivated, relevant to a type of signalling/severity, the Filtered record appears
in the Siae Alarm Summary window. This record displays the total alarms of the only records
present in the window. For example, if in the window there are only the Critical (Cleared 20 - Active
15) and Major (Cleared 5 - Active 3) records, the Filtered record will indicate the sum of their alarm
(Cleared 25 - Active 18).
In detail, the option:
Cleared (Filtered record), points out the total number of detected/cleared alarms relevant
only to the records present in the window.
Active (Filtered record), points out the total number of detected but not cleared alarms rel-
evant only to the records present in the window.

(6) Record:
Critical. Alarms with Critical severity.
Major. Alarms with Major severity.
Minor. Alarms with Minor severity.
Warning. Alarms with Warning severity.
Status. Status signallings.
Normal. Event signallings.
All. All the signallings (alarms, status, events).

(7) Option:
Cleared (Critical record). Detected/cleared alarms with Critical severity.
Cleared (Major record). Detected/cleared alarms with Major severity.
Cleared (Minor record). Detected/cleared alarms with Minor severity.
Cleared (Warning record). Detected/cleared alarms with Warning severity.
Cleared (Status record). Detected/cleared status signallings.
Cleared (Normal record). Detected/cleared event signallings.
Cleared (All record). Total number of detected/cleared signallings.

(8) Option:
Active (Critical record). Detected alarms with Critical severity.
Active (Major record). Detected alarms with Major severity.
Active (Minor record). Detected alarms with Minor severity.
Active (Warning record). Detected alarms with Warning severity.
Active (Status record). Detected status signallings.
Active (Normal record). Detected event signallings.
Active (All record). Total number of detected signallings.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 296


(9) Push-button:
Refresh. It updates the data.

The push-button is not available when the Auto Refresh box is active.
Clear Alert. It resets the signallings of status change.
Filter. It filters the alarms list.

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command.


The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45).

2. Press Filter.
The Filters Setting window opens.
Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing
the following option:
Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the
colour of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
of signalling). Activating the box:
Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed.
Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed.
Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed.
Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed.
Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed.
Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed.

The deactivation of a box causes the deletion of the relevant record from the Siae Alarm
Summary window and the displaying of the Filtered record (Fig.45).
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm.
Activating the box:
Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after
that displayed next to the option.
Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or
before that displayed next to the option.
To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling
bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar.
In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify
the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one
second.
Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determi-
nate a time interval.
Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press
Add From Map.
Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.
The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete from the list a single item pressing, after having highlighted it, the Re-
move push-button, or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE.
To set the criterion:
Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE.
Open the Object menu and set the wished object.
It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting
the All Objects item.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 297


Match Message String. Description of the selection.
To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases;
deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made.
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the marked record. Furthermore it
is possible to specify:
The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating
the TIC box and typing the code.
The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box
and typing the username.
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not marked yet will be displayed.
Description. Description displayed in the Filters:... area of the Siae Alarm Summary window
(Fig.45).
To set or modify the description, type an alphanumeric string in the box (minimum 1 maximum
128 characters).

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and
does not close the window).
The system displays in the Siae Alarm Summary window only the record that satisfy the activated cri-
teria.
Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones.
When the Siae Alarm Summary window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically
cleared.

In the window, there are the push-buttons:


Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file.
On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK.
Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match Ac-
knowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.
Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
Help. It opens the on-line manual.

The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To display the alarms stored in the alarm history

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command.


The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45).
2. Select the option relevant to the type/severity of signalling, for which you wish to display the relevant
list stored in the alarm history.
The Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) opens, where only the alarms of the selected type and se-
verity are displayed.
For example, if the Active option (Minor record) is selected, the Alarm History Browser window opens,
with displayed only the active alarms with Minor severity. To display the remaining of the alarm, it is
sufficient to change the filter.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 298


To reset the indication of status change

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command.


The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45).

2. Press Clear Alert.


The asterisks are removed.

To set the automatic updating of the data

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command.


The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45).

2. To ACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the window, activate the Auto Refresh box.
The data are automatically refresh each N seconds, displayed in the Timeout (sec) box.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (numeric value between 30 and 999 seconds).
It is possible to modify the value also when the automatic refresh is active. In this case, at next refresh
after the modification of the timeout, the new value will be acquired as valid.
3. To DEACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the window, deactivate the Auto Refresh box.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 299


SNMP-EVENT STATISTICS

System access Read Only, Read-Write


User profile Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Event Statistics command displays the statistics of the alarm/status/event signallings
(alarms) of the SNMP equipment.
With details it is possible:
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval (pag.300)
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment (pag.302)
To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms (pag.302)
To delete the alarms (pag.303)
To filter the alarms (pag.303)

The statistics refer to the alarms occurred on all the SNMP equipment present in the network.

To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command.


The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46).
2. Select the Graphics > Networks Event Counters command.
An histogram graph opens.
Each histogram identifies a day. For each day, the number of detected alarms of all the SNMP equip-
ment present in the network, is pointed out.
By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed. The parameters can be configu-
red by the Superuser.
3. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that day in periods of
15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter of hour. For each quarter, the number of alarms, detected by all
the SNMP equipment present in the network, is displayed.

Only the 15 minute periods, where alarms are present, are displayed.
Press Up to return to the previous display.

4. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the statistics of the alarms of that day/quarter,
subdivided by single equipment.
Each histogram identifies an equipment. For each equipment, the logic address, between brackets, the
equipment type and the number of detected alarms are pointed out.
Press Up to return to the previous display.

5. Double click on the histogram of an equipment to display the detail of the alarms detected by the equip-
ment in the specific day/quarter.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of
time that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are pointed out.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser
window (Fig.39) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41).

6. Press Up to return to the previous display.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 300


Fig.46 NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window

Menu bar (1) Type of visualization (2) Push-buttons (3)

Fig.46 notes

(1) Menu:
File > Close. It closes the window.
Graphics > Network Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by
days.
Graphics > Equipment Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by
equipment.
Graphics > Event Frequency. It display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms.
Maintenance > Filtered Delete. It deletes the specific group of the alarms stored into the sta-
tistics database.
Maintenance > Delete All. It deletes all alarms stored into the statistics database.
Help > On Usage. It opens the help on-line.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

(2) The wording changes depending on the displayed type of statistics.

(3) Push-button:
Up. It returns to the immediately previous display
Reload. It updates the data present in the window.
Filter. It filters the list of the alarms.
When one or more filter criteria are active, an asterisk is present in the push-button.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 301


To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command.


The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46).

2. Select the Graphics > Equipment Event Counters command.


An histogram graph opens.
Each histogram identifies a SNMP equipment. For each NE, the logic address, between brackets, the
equipment type and the number of alarms, detected and stored in the statistics database, are pointed
out.
The equipment are listed in decreasing order according to the number of detected alarms and only for
the SNMP equipment of the network that have generated alarms.

3. Double click on the histogram of an equipment to display the statistics of the relevant alarms subdivided
in days.
Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed.
The parameters can be configured by the Superuser.
Press Up to return to the previous display.

4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that equipment/day
subdivided in periods of 15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter.
Only the 15 minutes periods, where alarms are present, are displayed.
Press Up to return to the previous display.

5. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the detail of the alarms detected by the equipment
in the specific day/quarter.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of
times that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are detected.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser
window (Fig.39) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41).
Press Up to return to the previous display.

To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command.


The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46).

2. Select the Graphics > Event Frequency command.


An histogram graph opens.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm is pointed out:
Logical address and, between brackets, type of SNMP equipment where the alarm has been de-
tected.
Description of the alarm.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History
Browser window (Fig.39) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41).
Number of times that the alarm has been detected and stored in the statistics database.
The alarms are listed in decreasing order according to the number of times the alarm has been detected.

3. Double click on the histogram of an equipment/alarm to display the statistics of the alarm detection
subdivided in days.
Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed.
The parameters can be configured by the Superuser.
Press Up to return to the previous display.
4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistic of the detection of the subject alarm/day,
subdivided in periods of 15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter.

Only the 15 minutes periods, where alarms are present, are displayed.
Press Up to return to the previous display.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001 302


To delete the alarms

This operation allows deleting ONLY the alarms stored in the statistics database and not in the general
database of NMS5UX-B (for this operation, refer to pag.267).

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command.


The NMS5U